Large Format Printer

User Manual

ENG

Contents ???

ii Contents

Contents iii

iv Contents

Contents

vi Contents

Contents vii

viii Contents

Contents ix

Contents

Contents xi

xii Contents

Contents xiii

Contents

xiv Contents

How to use this manual

Introduction

How to use this manual

About This User Manual

???Symbols

The following symbols are used in this User Manual to indicate safety information and explanations on restrictions or precautions in use.

???Button names and user interface elements

Key and button names on the control panel and user interface elements in software (such as menus and buttons) are indicated as follows in this User Manual.

???Part names

Names of printer parts are indicated as follows in this User Manual.

???Cross-reference

Other pages or manuals that provide related information are indicated as follows in this User Manual.

Introduction 1

How to use this manual

???Figures and software screens

???Figures in this User Manual may be different from the actual appearance of the printer in some cases.

???Screens depicted in this User Manual for the printer driver or other software may be different from the actual screens because of subsequent updates.

???Windows XP screens are used in explanations of Windows operations in this User Manual.

???Trademarks

???Canon, the Canon logo, and imagePROGRAF are trademarks or registered trademarks of Canon Inc.

???Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

???Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries.

???Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

???Copyright

??2009 Canon Inc.

???Unauthorized reproduction of this User Manual in whole or part is prohibited.

???May we request

Thank you for understanding the following points.

???The information in this User Manual is subject to change without notice.

???We strive to ensure accuracy of information in this User Manual, but if you notice errors or omissions, please contact us.

2 Introduction

How to use this manual

Searching Topics

You can ???nd information in topics of this User Manual by searching for relevant terms.

1. Enter a term and click the Search button.

Note

??? To search for multiple terms at once, enter a space between each term.

Search results are listed at left.

Introduction 3

How to use this manual

2. Click a topic you want to read.

The terms you searched for will be highlighted in the topic.

To review multiple topics at once, select the check box of desired topics and click the Apply button.

4 Introduction

How to use this manual

HTML Version of the Manual for Printing

You can select a group of topics in the table of contents or individual topics in this manual for printing.

The following procedure describes how to do this, using the information in Basic Printing Work???ow as an example.

Printing a group of topics in the manual

When you access printable HTML versions of the content from section titles in the table of contents, you can specify a group of topics to print.

1. Click a section title in the table of contents. Here, Basic Printing Work???ow is used as an

example.

Introduction 5

How to use this manual

2. Click Access to the HTML for printing in the title area.

The topics in Basic Printing Work???ow are displayed together in HTML format, ready for printing.

6 Introduction

How to use this manual

3. Clear the sections you will not print and click the Apply button.

Printing a group of individual topics in the manual

When you access printable HTML versions from subtitles in the table of contents, you can specify a group of topics to print.

1. Click a section title in the table of contents. Here, Basic Printing Work???ow is used as an

example.

Introduction 7

How to use this manual

2. Under Basic Printing Work???ow, click Printing Procedure.

3. Click Access to the HTML for printing in the title area.

8 Introduction

How to use this manual

The topics in Printing Procedure are displayed together in HTML format, ready for printing.

4. Clear the topics you will not print and click the Apply button.

Introduction 9

How to use this manual

Printing selected topics

Print selected topics as follows.

1. Access the printing dialog box as follows, depending on your computer???s operating system.

???Windows

In Windows, right-click anywhere in the explanation area except on a ???gure or a link.In the shortcut menu, click Print to display the Print dialog box.

10 Introduction

How to use this manual

???Macintosh

On a Macintosh computer, click anywhere in the explanation area except on a ???gure or a link while holding the Ctrl key. In the shortcut menu, click Print Frame to display the Print dialog box.

2. Specify conditions as needed, and then click Print (Windows) or Print (Macintosh).

??? Windows

Introduction 11

How to use this manual

??? Macintosh

Note

??? To print only individual topics that are displayed, use this method.

12 Introduction

Printer parts

Printer Parts

Printer parts

Front

a.Roll Cover

Open this cover to load rolls. (???P.17)

b.Paper Feed Slot

When loading paper, insert it here.

c.Roll Ledge

When loading rolls, rest the Roll Holder here before loading it in the Roll Holder Slot.

d.Release Lever

When releasing the Paper Retainer, push this lever back.

e.Control Panel

Use this panel to operate the printer and check the printer status. (???P.20)

f.Ink Tank Cover

Open this cover to replace an Ink Tank. (???P.18)

g.Paper Alignment Line

An orange line for alignment of paper.

h.Maintenance Cartridge Cover

Open this cover to replace the Maintenance Cartridge.

i.Maintenance Cartridge

Absorbs ink used for maintenance purposes such as head cleaning. (Replace the cartridge when it is full.)

Printer Parts 13

Printer parts

j.Cutter Unit

A round-bladed cutter for automatic roll cutting.

k.Cutter Rail

The Cutter Unit passes over this rail to cut paper.

l.Output Tray

All printed documents are ejected from this slot.

m.Ejection Guide

Guides printed documents as they are ejected.

n.Top Cover

Open this cover to install the Printhead and remove any jammed paper from inside the printer, as needed. (???P.16)

o.Width Guide

When loading the sheets , move the guide to match the paper size.

p.Stand

A stand that holds the printer. Equipped with casters to facilitate moving it. (???P.19)

14 Printer Parts

Printer parts

Side

a.Manual Pocket

Store printer manuals in this pocket.

b.Ethernet Port

Connect an Ethernet cable to this port. The lamp is lit if the Ethernet cable is connected correctly and communication is possible between the computer and printer.

c.USB Port

Connect a USB cable to this port. The printer is compatible with Hi-Speed USB connections.

d.Carrying Handles

When carrying the printer, have three people hold it by these handles on the back at both ends.

e.Power Supply Connector

Connect the power cord to this connector.

Printer Parts 15

Printer parts

Top Cover (Inside)

a.Carriage

Moves the Printhead. The carriage serves a key role in printing. (???P.17)

b.Carriage Shaft

The Carriage slides along this shaft.

c.Paper Retainer

Important in supplying the paper. This retainer holds paper as it is fed.

d.Platen

The Printhead moves across the platen to print. Vacuum holes on the platen hold paper in place.

e.Borderless Printing Ink Grooves

For catching ink outside the edges of paper during borderless printing.

f.Linear Scale

The linear scale serves a key role in detecting the Carriage position. Be careful not to touch this part when cleaning inside the Top Cover or clearing paper jams.

g.Cleaning Brush

When cleaning inside the printer under the Top Cover, use this brush to sweep away paper dust on the Platen.

16 Printer Parts

Printer parts

Roll Cover (Inside)

a.Roll Holder

Load the roll on this holder.

b.Holder Stopper

Secure rolls on the Roll Holder with this part.

c.Roll Loading Slots

Slide the Roll Holder along these slots.

d.Roll Holder Slot

Load the Roll Holder into this holder slot.

Carriage

a.Angle Adjustment Lever

Use this lever to ???ne-tune the printer to correct misalignment of printed lines.

b.Printhead

The printhead is equipped with ink nozzles. The carriage serves a key role in printing.

c.Printhead Fixer Lever

Locks the Printhead Fixer Cover.

d.Printhead Fixer Cover

Holds the Printhead in place.

Printer Parts 17

Printer parts

Ink Tank Cover (Inside)

a.Ink Tank Lock Lever

A lever that locks the Ink Tank in place and protects it. Lift and press down the lever when replacing an Ink Tank.

b.Ink Set Label

An Ink Tank that can be used in the printer is labeled with a white letter ???J??? in a black circle on the side. When purchasing an Ink Tank, make sure a ???J??? is printed on the label. (???P.622)

c.Ink Color Label

Load an Ink Tank that matches the color and name on this label.

d.Ink Lamp (Red)

Indicates the state of the Ink Tank as follows when the Ink Tank Cover is opened.

???On

The Ink Tank is installed correctly.

???Off

No Ink Tank is installed, or the ink level detection function has been released.

???Flashing Slowly Not much ink is left.

???Flashing Rapidly There is no ink left.

e.Ink Tank

Cartridges of ink in various colors.

18 Printer Parts

Printer parts

Stand

a.Accessory Pocket

Stores printer accessories.

b.Output Stacker

Printed documents are ejected into the output tray.

c.Locking Caster

Lock to immobilize the caster.

Before moving the printer, always unlock all four casters. Moving the printer while casters are locked may scratch the casters or the ???oor.

d.Adjustable Stopper

Pull out when using the output stacker in the extended position.

e.Paper Guide

Guides printed documents into the output stacker.

Printer Parts 19

Printer parts

Control Panel

a.Display Screen

Shows printer menus, as well as the printer status and messages.

b.Data Lamp (green)

???Flashing

During printing, the Data lamp ???ashes when the printer is receiving or processing print jobs. Otherwise, this lamp ???ashes when the print job is paused or the printer is updating the ???rmware.

???Off

There are no active print jobs when the Data lamp is off.

c.Message Lamp (orange)

???On

A warning message is displayed.

???Flashing

An error message is displayed.

???Off

The printer is off or is operating normally.

d.Power button (green)

Turns the printer on and off. (???P.24)

The Power button is lit when the printer is on or in Sleep mode.

e.Stop button

Cancels print jobs in progress and ends the ink drying period.

f.Navigate button

Enables you to check instructions for loading and removing paper or replacing ink tanks or printheads, as well as other operations. (???P.29)

g.Arrow buttons

?????? button

Press this button on the Tab Selection screen to move to another tab.

In menu items requiring numerical input, press this button to move to another digit.

?????? button

Press this button when viewing menus to display the next menu item or setting value.

?????? button

Press this button on the Tab Selection screen to move to another tab.

In menu items requiring numerical input, press this button to move to another digit.

?????? button

Press this button when viewing menus to display the next menu item or setting value.

20 Printer Parts

Printer parts

h.OK button

Press this button on the Tab Selection screen to display the menu of the tab shown.

Pressing this button in menu items of each tab for which is displayed at left will move to the lower level of the menu item, enabling you to execute menu commands or set menu values.

Also press this button if the Display Screen indicates to press the OK button.

i.Back button

Displays the screen before the current screen.

j.Menu button

Displays the Tab Selection screen. (???P.49)

k.Load button

Press this button when loading or replacing paper. (???P.106)

(???P.136)

l.Feed button

Pressing this button when rolls are loaded enables you to reposition the paper. (???P.125)

m.Cut button

Pressing this button when rolls are loaded cuts the paper, if you have speci???ed Automatic or Eject in Cutting Mode in the Control Panel menu. (???P.129)

n.Cut Sheet lamp (green)

Lit when sheets are selected as the paper source.

o.Roll Media lamp (green)

Lit when rolls are selected as the paper source.

Note

??? To recover from Sleep mode, any button can be pressed except the Power button.

Printer Parts 21

Control Panel

Control Panel

Control Panel

a.Display Screen

Shows printer menus, as well as the printer status and messages.

b.Data Lamp (green)

???Flashing

During printing, the Data lamp ???ashes when the printer is receiving or processing print jobs. Otherwise, this lamp ???ashes when the print job is paused or the printer is updating the ???rmware.

???Off

There are no active print jobs when the Data lamp is off.

c.Message Lamp (orange)

???On

A warning message is displayed.

???Flashing

An error message is displayed.

???Off

The printer is off or is operating normally.

d.Power button (green)

Turns the printer on and off. (???P.24)

The Power button is lit when the printer is on or in Sleep mode.

e.Stop button

Cancels print jobs in progress and ends the ink drying period.

f.Navigate button

Enables you to check instructions for loading and removing paper or replacing ink tanks or printheads, as well as other operations. (???P.29)

22 Printer Parts

Control Panel

g.Arrow buttons

?????? button

Press this button on the Tab Selection screen to move to another tab.

In menu items requiring numerical input, press this button to move to another digit.

?????? button

Press this button when viewing menus to display the next menu item or setting value.

?????? button

Press this button on the Tab Selection screen to move to another tab.

In menu items requiring numerical input, press this button to move to another digit.

?????? button

Press this button when viewing menus to display the next menu item or setting value.

h.OK button

Press this button on the Tab Selection screen to display the menu of the tab shown.

Pressing this button in menu items of each tab for which is displayed at left will move to the lower level of the menu item, enabling you to execute menu commands or set menu values.

Also press this button if the Display Screen indicates to press the OK button.

i.Back button

Displays the screen before the current screen.

j.Menu button

Displays the Tab Selection screen. (???P.49)

k.Load button

Press this button when loading or replacing paper. (???P.106)

(???P.136)

l.Feed button

Pressing this button when rolls are loaded enables you to reposition the paper. (???P.125)

m.Cut button

Pressing this button when rolls are loaded cuts the paper, if you have speci???ed Automatic or Eject in Cutting Mode in the Control Panel menu. (???P.129)

n.Cut Sheet lamp (green)

Lit when sheets are selected as the paper source.

o.Roll Media lamp (green)

Lit when rolls are selected as the paper source.

Note

??? To recover from Sleep mode, any button can be pressed except the Power button.

Printer Parts 23

Control Panel

Turning the Printer On and Off

Turning the printer on

1. Press the Power button to turn on the printer. The printer will now start up.

After the Display Screen shows the Canon logo, Starting up... Please wait. is displayed.

2. The Power Lamp is lit when the printer ???nishes starting up, and the printer is now in Standby.

The printer will not go into Standby in the following situations. Take the appropriate action.

???The Top Cover is open Close the Top Cover.

???The Ink Tank Cover is open Close the Ink Tank Cover.

???The Printhead is not installed

see ???Replacing the Printhead???. (???P.633)

???An Ink Tank is not installed

see ???Replacing Ink Tanks???. (???P.623)

???If ???ERROR??? is shown on the Display Screen (See "Error messages.")

???The Power Lamp and Message Lamp are not lit (even once), and nothing appears on the Display Screen

Make sure the printer is plugged in correctly. Check the connection at the plug and electrical outlet.

???No paper is loaded

Load paper. (???P.78) (???P.81)

Important

???Starting the printer when it is connected via the USB cable to a Macintosh computer that is off may cause the computer to start up at the same time. To prevent this, disconnect the USB cable before starting the printer. Connecting the printer to the computer via a USB hub may solve this issue.

24 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Turning the printer off

Important

??? Never disconnect the printer???s power supply or unplug it during a print job. This may damage the printer.

1.Make sure no print jobs are in progress.

If the Message Lamp is ???ashing, check the message on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. (See "Error Messages.")

If the Data Lamp is ???ashing, the printer is receiving a print job. Turn off the printer only after printing is ???nished.

2. Hold down the Power button for more than a second.

After Shut Down.. Please Wait.. is shown on the Display Screen, the printer shuts off.

Printer Parts 25

Control Panel

Control Panel Display

After the printer starts up, the Tab Selection screen is displayed.

Each of the four tabs presents status, menus, and error information related to the particular tab.

Types of tabs

The Tab Selection screen presents four tabs. Each tab is represented by an icon in the top row. Press the ??? or ??? button to access other tabs.

26 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Printer status and modes

Printer status is classi???ed according to the following ???ve modes.

Printer Parts 27

Control Panel

Mode transition

???Mode display

The printer mode is indicated as follows.

*1: The printer automatically enters Sleep mode when idle for a speci???c period (by default, ???ve minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or buttons are pressed while all covers are closed. However, it does not enter Sleep mode while error messages are displayed.

*2: In Sleep mode, any button can be pressed except the Power button to recover from Sleep mode. Sleep mode is also terminated if a print job is received or a command is issued from RemoteUI.

???Error display

Mode transition during error display is as follows.

If multiple errors occur, tabs related to errors other than the error currently shown ???ash. Press the ??? or ??? button to access other tabs and check those errors. If multiple errors occur that are related to the Job tab and Settings/Adj. tab, each error message is displayed for 4 seconds on each tab before another message is shown.

28 Printer Parts

Control Panel

How to View Instructions With Navigate

You can refer to instructions for loading paper, replacing ink tanks, and performing other operations on the printer control panel.

1. Press the Navigate button.

2. Press ??? or ??? to select the desired navigation menu.

3. Press ??? or ??? to select View Op. Guide, and then press the OK button. Instructions are now displayed.

???Example: Loading sheets

Printer Parts 29

Control Panel

Printer Menu Operations

The printer menu is classi???ed into menu items available when no print job is in progress and menu items only available during printing.

???Menu operations when no print job is in progress (???P.30)

???Menu operations during printing (???P.31)

Menu operations when no print job is in progress

To view available menus organized on tabs, select a tab on the Tab Selection screen and press the OK button.

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, pressing OK will not display menus. Menus can be selected after you resolve the problem.

The following operations are available from the menu.

???Paper Menu

Paper menu settings

???Ink Menu

Ink menu operations

???Job Menu

Menu operations to manage print jobs

???Set./Adj. Menu

Menu operations for printer adjustment and maintenance Settings related to HP-GL2 jobs

For a description of speci???c menu items available, see ???Menu Settings???. (???P.49)

For instructions on selecting menu items, see ???Menu Operations???. (???P.32)

Note

???By default, menu settings apply to all print jobs. However, for settings that are also available in the printer driver, the values speci???ed in the printer driver take priority.

30 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Menu operations during printing

To display menus during printing, select a tab on the Tab Selection screen on the Control Panel, and then press the OK button. Other menus are available after printing is ???nished.

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, pressing OK will not display menus. Menus can be selected after you resolve the problem.

The following operations are available from the menu during printing.

???Ink Menu

Ink menu operations

???Job Menu

Menu operations to manage print jobs

???Set./Adj. Menu

Fine-tuning paper feeding

Display of printer-related information

For a description of speci???c menu items available during printing, see ???Menu Settings (During Printing)???. (???P.60)

For instructions on selecting menu items during printing, see ???Menu Operations???. (???P.32)

Printer Parts 31

Control Panel

Menu Operations

To view available menus organized on tabs, select a tab on the Tab Selection screen and press the OK button. For details, see ???Menu Settings???. (???P.49)

??? Menus (when the Ink tab is selected and the OK button is pressed)

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, pressing OK will not display menus. Menus can be selected after you resolve the problem.

Simply press buttons on the Control Panel to access menus on various tabs from the Tab Selection screen and set or execute Menu items.

The following section describes menu operations and how they are presented in this User Manual.

???Accessing menus (???P.33)

???Specifying menu items (???P.34)

???Specifying numerical values (???P.34)

???Executing menu commands (???P.34)

32 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Accessing menus

Printer menus are grouped by function.

Menus are displayed with the upper line selected. You can use the buttons on the Control Panel to access each menu.

???Press Back to access a higher menu in the menu list, and press OK to access a lower one. If not all menu items are displayed, hold down ??? or ??? to scroll through higher and lower menu items. Items you select are highlighted.

The scroll bar at right indicates the current position in the overall menu.

???Lower menus are available if is displayed at right next to the second and subsequent rows. To access the lower menus, select the menu and press the OK button.

Printer Parts 33

Control Panel

Specifying menu items

Menu items can be set as follows.

1. Press ??? or ??? to select the desired setting, and then press the OK button.

After two seconds, the display reverts to the upper level menu.

Note

???If a con???rmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, press the OK button. The setting is applied, and the printer is now in Standby.

Specifying numerical values

Follow these steps to enter numbers. In this example, network settings items are entered.

1.

2.

Press the ??? or ??? button to move to the next ???eld for input.

Press the ??? or ??? button to enter the value.

Note

???Hold down ??? or ??? to increase or decrease the value continuously.

3.Repeat steps 1 and 2 to complete the settings, and then press the OK button.

Note

???If a con???rmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, press the OK button. The setting is applied, and the printer is now in Standby.

Executing menu commands

Menu commands can be executed as follows.

1. Press ??? or ??? to select the action to execute, and then press the OK button.

The menu command is now executed.

34 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Menu Structure

The menu structure is organized by tabs, as follows. Values at right indicated by an asterisk are the defaults.

???Paper Menu (???P.35)

???Ink Menu (???P.37)

???Job Menu (???P.38)

???Set./Adj. Menu (???P.39)

For instructions on menu operations, see ???Menu Operations???. (???P.32)

For details on menu items, see ???Menu Settings???. (???P.49)

Paper Menu

Printer Parts 35

Control Panel

36 Printer Parts

Control Panel

*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95) Types of paper in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel) are updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you update paper information with the Media Con???guration Tool. (See the Media Con???guration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Con???guration Tool Guide (Macintosh).)

*2: For information on the sizes of paper the printer supports, see ???Paper Sizes???. (???P.100)

*3: Available only if ManageRemainRoll is On.

*4: Available only if Width Detection is Off.

Ink Menu

First Level

Rep. Ink Tank

Head Cleaning A

Printer Parts 37

Control Panel

Job Menu

38 Printer Parts

Printer Parts 39

Control Panel

40 Printer Parts

Printer Parts 41

Control Panel

42 Printer Parts

Printer Parts 43

Control Panel

44 Printer Parts

Printer Parts 45

Control Panel

46 Printer Parts

Printer Parts 47

Control Panel

*1: Available after you have used Auto(Advanced) in Head Posi. Adj. once.

*2: Available if Adj. Priority is Automatic or Print Quality.

*3: Available if Adj. Priority is Automatic or Print Length.

*4: Not displayed if IPv4 Mode is Manual.

*5: Not displayed if NetWare is Off.

*6: Not displayed if Auto Detect is On.

*7: Follows the setting in Date Format.

*8: Viewing and con???guration is possible for administrators, and only viewing for other users.

*9: Viewing and con???guration is possible for administrators only.

48 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Menu Settings

Menu items are as follows.

For instructions on selecting menu items, see ???Menu Operations???. (???P.32)

For details on menu levels and values, see ???Menu Structure???. (???P.35)

Paper Menu

Printer Parts 49

Control Panel

*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95) The types of paper indicated in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel) are updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you update paper information by using the Media Con???guration Tool. (See Media Con???guration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Con???guration Tool Guide (Macintosh).)

50 Printer Parts

Job Menu

*1: Indicates a rough estimate of how much ink was consumed per page. Actual ink consumption may be different. The average margin of error for estimates calculated according to Canon measurement conditions for ink costs is ??15%. Canon does not guarantee the accuracy of these estimates.

Estimates may vary depending on conditions of use. Calculation of these estimates does not include ink consumed when cleaning printheads by forceful ejection of ink.

Printer Parts 51

Control Panel

Set./Adj. Menu

52 Printer Parts

Printer Parts 53

Control Panel

54 Printer Parts

Printer Parts 55

Control Panel

56 Printer Parts

Printer Parts 57

Control Panel

58 Printer Parts

*1: Indicates a rough estimate of how much ink was consumed per page. Actual ink consumption may be different. The average margin of error for estimates calculated according to Canon measurement conditions for ink costs is ??15%. Canon does not guarantee the accuracy of these estimates.

Estimates may vary depending on conditions of use. Calculation of these estimates does not include ink consumed when cleaning printheads by forceful ejection of ink.

*2: It is not possible to match the colors and image quality produced by the speci???ed printer exactly.

Printer Parts 59

Control Panel

Menu Settings (During Printing)

Menu items are described in the following tables.

For instructions on selecting menu items, see ???Menu Operations???. (???P.32)

For details on menu levels and values, see ???Menu Structure???. (???P.35)

Ink Menu

Job Menu

*1: Indicates a rough estimate of how much ink was consumed per page. Actual ink consumption may be different. The average margin of error for estimates calculated according to Canon measurement conditions for ink costs is ??15%. Canon does not guarantee the accuracy of these estimates.

Estimates may vary depending on conditions of use. Calculation of these estimates does not include ink consumed when cleaning printheads by forceful ejection of ink.

60 Printer Parts

Printer Parts 61

Control Panel

Status Print

You can print a Status Print report indicating the current status of the printer.

With Status Print, information is printed regarding the printer ???rmware version, various settings, and the status of consumables.

Printing Status Print reports

1. Load paper.

If using sheets, load paper of A4/Letter size. You will need at least two sheets.

2. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

3.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select Test Print, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Status Print, and then press the OK button.

Checking the information in Status Print reports

The following information is included in Status Print reports.

62 Printer Parts

Printer Parts 63

Control Panel

COUNTER

CUTTER

MEDIA

LIFE TTL

LIFE ROLL

LIFE CUTSHEET

MEDIA 1-7,OTHER

NAME

TTL

ROLL

CUTSHEET

AFTER INSTALLATION

Utilization status of the cutter, media, and other items (indicating how much they have been used).

64 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Printing Interface Setting Reports

You can print an Interface Print report indicating the current interface settings values of the printer. Interface Print reports indicate settings values for TCP/IP, NetWare, and other settings.

Printing Interface Print reports

1. Load the paper.

If using sheets, load paper A4/Letter-sized, you will need at least three sheets.

2. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

3.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select Test Print, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Interface Print, and then press the OK button.

Con???rming Interface Print information

The following information is included in the Interface Print report.

Printer Parts 65

Control Panel

66 Printer Parts

Printer Parts 67

Control Panel

*1: Only items con???gured in Print Application are printed.

68 Printer Parts

Control Panel

Checking Instructions During Printer Operations

You can refer to instructions on the printer control panel when loading paper, replacing ink tanks, or performing other operations.

How to view instructions

Once you complete an action described in the instructions, the printer detects the action and switches to the next instruction screen.

In the case of actions the printer cannot detect, instruction screens are switched every four seconds, and the sequence of operations is shown repeatedly.

When all actions in the sequence are ???nished, the instruction screen for the next step is displayed.

???Example: Ink tank replacement

Note

???During a continuous display of instructions, you can press the ??? button to pause the instructions on the current screen.

Press the ??? or ??? button to display the previous or next screens. If you do not press the ??? or ??? button within 30 seconds, continuous display is resumed.

Press the OK button to display the instruction screen for the next step.

Printer Parts 69

Optional accessories

Optional accessories

Roll Holder Set

Load a roll on the roll holder and then load the holder in the printer. The Roll Holder in the Roll Holder Set RH2-33 is for use with both 2-inch and 3-inch paper cores. Use the correct attachment for the particular paper core. (???P.103)

???Roll Holder Set RH2-33

???Roll Holder (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores)

??? Attachments

70 Printer Parts

Printer Speci???cations

Printer Speci???cations

Speci???cations

Important

???This information is subject to change as the printer is updated.

???The following values may vary depending on the operating environment.

Printer

*1: The printer uses a trace amount of power even when turned off. To stop all power consumption, turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.

*2: Calculation based on ISO 7779. Operating conditions: On the Main sheet of the printer driver, Media Type > Plain Paper, Advanced Settings > Print Priority > Line Drawing/Text, and Print Quality > Standard.

Printing performance

*1: Prints with a minimum 1/2400 inch dot pitch between ink droplets.

Printer Parts 71

Printer Speci???cations

Interface

*1: Use in USB 2.0 High Speed mode requires the following environment:

???Computer: USB 2.0 High-Speed-compatible

???Operating system: Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2003/Windows XP/ Windows 2000 or Mac OS X ver. 10.3.9 or later

???USB 2.0 driver: Microsoft USB 2.0 driver (available from Windows Update or the Service Pack.)

???USB cable: Certi???ed USB 2.0 cable

Ink

*1: The provided Starter Ink Tanks contain 90 ml (3.0 ??? oz) each.

72 Printer Parts

Printer Speci???cations

Paper (*1)

*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide (???P.95)

*2: When supplying paper, use a roll approximately 1,000 mm (1,093.6 yd) or longer.

*3: Printing may not be possible in some cases, depending on the type and size of paper.

Printer Parts 73

Printer Speci???cations

Output stacker capacity, in sheets

*1: For information on types of paper you can use with the stacker in Extended position, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

Options

74 Printer Parts

Printer Speci???cations

Print Area

A margin required by the printer is added with respect to the size of paper loaded in the printer. Except in borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to the paper size minus the space for this margin.

Note

???Printable Area: The area that can be printed.

???There is no margin (that is, a margin of 0 mm) during borderless printing on rolls.

???Recommended Print Area: We recommend printing within this area.

???To print so that your original matches the print area exactly, use an oversized paper size that includes the required margin. (???P.219)

Sheets

???Printable Area

a margin of 3 mm (0.12 in) on top, 23 mm (0.91 in) on bottom, and 3 mm (0.12 in) on left and right sides is required.

???Recommended Print Area

A margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) on top, 23 mm (0.91 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right sides is required.

Rolls

???Printable Area

A margin of 3 mm (0.12 in) on all sides is required. During borderless printing, the margin on all sides is 0 mm. For information on paper compatible with borderless printing, see the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

???Recommended Print Area

A margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) on top, 5 mm (0.20 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right sides is required.

Printer Parts 75

Printing procedure

Basic Printing Work???ow

Printing procedure

Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets

The printer supports both rolls and sheets.

This section introduces the main features of each, as well as the main printing methods available. Select rolls or sheets to suit your particular printing application.

Note

???For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

???A variety of other ways to print are available besides those introduced here. Choose the printing method that suits your particular printing application, referring to "Working With Various Print Jobs" and "Enhanced Printing Options" from the table of contents.

Roll printing

Media in spooled rolls is generally called Roll Media. Rolls are loaded on the Roll Holder, which are in turn loaded in the printer.

Rolls can be used to print large photos or create posters or banners that cannot be printed on regular sheets.

???Large-format printing

Easily print vertical or horizontal banners from familiar applications such as Microsoft Of???ce applications. (???P.253)

???Borderless printing

Print without a margin (border) around posters or photos. (???P.232)

(???P.239)

(???P.225)

???Banner printing

You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages. (???P.275)

???90-degree rotation before printing

Originals in portrait orientation are rotated 90 degrees when possible to use paper more ef???ciently. (???P.301)

???Enlarged/reduced printing

You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing originals before printing. (???P.201)

(???P.207)

(???P.213)

???Free Layout function

Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet programs, and so on) next to each other.

(???P.269)

76 Basic Printing Work???ow

Printing procedure

Sheet printing

Sheets refer to individual sheets of paper.

Insert the sheet between the Platen and the Paper Retainer.

???Enlarged/reduced printing

You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing originals before printing. (???P.201)

(???P.213)

???Free Layout function

Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet programs, and so on) next to each other.

(???P.269)

Basic Printing Work???ow 77

Printing procedure

Loading and Printing on Rolls

These are the basic steps for loading and printing on rolls.

Follow these steps to load and print on rolls.

Note

???For details on supported sizes and types of rolls, see ???Paper Sizes??? or the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.100) (???P.95)

???If you prefer to wait for the ink to dry after printing and simply eject the document, you can deactivate automatic cutting and cut the paper manually. (???P.129)

1.Turn the printer on. (???P.24)

2. Load the roll on the Roll Holder. (???P.103)

78 Basic Printing Work???ow

3.

4.

Printing procedure

Load the roll in the printer. (???P.106)

Select the type of paper. (???P.110)

Note

???If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to On, specify the roll length after the type of paper. (???P.112)

Basic Printing Work???ow 79

Printing procedure

5. Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.

???Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (???P.86)

???Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (???P.88)

6. Send the print job.

???Printing in Windows (???P.83)

???Printing in Mac OS X (???P.84)

The printer now starts printing the print job.

80 Basic Printing Work???ow

Printing procedure

Loading and Printing on Sheets

These are the basic steps for loading sheets and then printing.

Follow the steps below to load and print on sheets.

Note

???For details on supported types and sizes of paper, see ???Paper Sizes??? or the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.100) (???P.95)

1.Turn the printer on. (???P.24)

2. Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.

???Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (???P.86)

???Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (???P.88)

3. Send the print job.

???Printing in Windows (???P.83)

???Printing in Mac OS X (???P.84)

Basic Printing Work???ow 81

Printing procedure

4. Load the sheet. (???P.136)

The printer now starts printing the print job.

82 Basic Printing Work???ow

Printing procedure

Printing in Windows

Print from the application menu.

Important

???The Windows printer driver can be used in the following versions of Windows.

???Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)

???Windows XP (Home Edition or Professional)

???Windows Server 2003 (Standard Edition)

???Windows Vista

???Windows Server 2008

???We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.

1.In the source application, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.

2.After con???rming that the printer is selected in the dialog box, click Print or OK to start printing.

Note

???The appearance of the dialog box varies depending on the software application. In most cases, the dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of pages, number of copies, and so on.

Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application

Note

???If another printer is selected, select the printer you want to use under Select Printer or in the dialog box displayed after clicking Printer.

Settings for many printing methods (including enlarged or reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on) are displayed in the printer driver dialog box. There are two ways to access the printer driver dialog box, as follows.

???From the application (???P.346)

???From the operating system menu (???P.348)

Basic Printing Work???ow 83

Printing procedure

Printing in Mac OS X

Print from the application menu after registering the printer.

Important

???The Macintosh printer driver can be used in the following versions of Mac OS.

???Mac OS X 10.3.9-10.5

???We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.

Registering the printer

Before printing, you must register the printer in imagePROGRAF PrinterSetup.app.

For instructions on registering the printer, see ???Con???guring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)???. (???P.596)

Important

???During this setup process, the printer will not be listed among available printers if it is off or disconnected.

???By default, the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer. In Mac OS X 10.4 and earlier, you must enable AppleTalk protocol on the printer before using the printer in an AppleTalk network. For instructions on activating AppleTalk protocol, see ???Con???guring the Destination for AppleTalk Networks (Macintosh)???. (???P.598)

Printing from the source application

1. In the source application, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing

conditions.

Note

???This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of pages, number of copies, and so on.

2.Select the printer in the Printer list.

84 Basic Printing Work???ow

Printing procedure

3. Click Print to start printing.

As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete settings for various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on.

Basic Printing Work???ow 85

Printing procedure

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)

If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.

Important

???Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.

If the type and size do not match, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

Note

???Click the B Get Information button to display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box. On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and con???gure printer driver settings for the feed source and type of paper.

5.Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

86 Basic Printing Work???ow

Printing procedure

6. In the A Page Size list, select the size of the original as speci???ed in the application.

7. In the L Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.

8. If you have selected Roll Paper in L Paper Source, select the width of the loaded roll in M Roll

Paper Width.

Note

???A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications. For details on available printing conditions, see ???Printer Driver Settings (Windows)???. (???P.336)

Basic Printing Work???ow 87

Printing procedure

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)

If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. Choose the original size in the F Paper Size list.

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

88 Basic Printing Work???ow

Printing procedure

7. Access the Page Setup pane.

8. In the A Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.

9. If you have selected Manual in A Paper Source, make sure the size as selected in Page Setup is displayed in C Page Size. If you have selected Roll Paper in A Paper Source, make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Width.

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

Note

???A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications. For details on available printing conditions, see ???Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.454)

Basic Printing Work???ow 89

Canceling print jobs

Canceling print jobs

Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel

To cancel printing or reception of print jobs, press the Stop button on the Control Panel.

When you press the Stop button during printing, printer operation varies depending on the current status.

???If you press the Stop button before printing starts

Pressing the Stop button before printing starts will display a con???rmation message. To cancel the print job, select Yes.

???If you press the Stop button during printing

Pressing the Stop button during printing will display a con???rmation message. To cancel the print job immediately, select Yes.

90 Basic Printing Work???ow

Canceling print jobs

Canceling Print Jobs from Windows

In the printer window, you can cancel jobs that are being sent to the printer.

Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, you can cancel print jobs that have already been received by the printer or that are currently being printed.

1. Click the printer icon in the taskbar to display the printer window.

Note

???You can also display this window by double-clicking the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or Printers) folder, accessible through the Windows start menu.

2.Right-click the job to cancel and select Cancel.

3. If the job to cancel is not shown in the printer window (that is, if the print data has already been received by the printer), double-click the taskbar icon to display imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.

4. On the Printer Status sheet, click Cancel Job.

Basic Printing Work???ow 91

Canceling print jobs

Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X

In the printer window, you can cancel jobs that are being sent to the printer.

Otherwise, you can cancel jobs from imagePROGRAF Printmonitor if they have been received by the printer or are currently being printed.

Note

???Print jobs are shown in the printer window while they are being sent from the computer. After transmission, jobs are not displayed even during printing.

???Print jobs are displayed in the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor window from the moment the printer starts receiving the print data until the moment printing is ???nished. They are not displayed before print data is sent to the printer, even if the computer has started preparing the print data.

1.Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the printer window.

2.Click Stop Jobs to stop printing.

3. If there are no jobs in the printer window that can be canceled, (that is, if the print data has already been sent to the printer), click Utility to display imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.

92 Basic Printing Work???ow

Canceling print jobs

4. Select the print job to cancel and click to delete the print job.

The job sent to the printer is canceled.

5. Exit imagePROGRAF Printmonitor. In the printer window, click Start Jobs.

Important

???Always follow these steps if you cancel print jobs from imagePROGRAF Printmonitor. If you do not restart job processing, the next job cannot be printed.

Basic Printing Work???ow 93

Pausing Printing

Pausing Printing

Pausing Printing

During printing, if you set Pause Print in the Control Panel menu to On, printing is stopped at that point and the printer enters a state in which printing is paused. (???P.26)

Printing from the job queue is not possible in this state.

To restore normal operation after this state, set Pause Print to Off.

Note

???In the following cases, the status is cleared even if you do not set Pause Print to Off, and printing from the job queue resumes.

???When paper is advanced

???When you execute Chg. Paper Type in the Paper Menu

1.During printing, on the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Job tab ().

2.

3.

4.

Note

??? If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Press the OK button.

The Job Menu is displayed.

Press ??? or ??? to select Pause Print, and then press the OK button. Press ??? or ??? to select On or Off, and then press the OK button.

94 Basic Printing Work???ow

Paper

Handling Paper

Paper

Types of Paper

For information on the types of paper the printer supports (such as plain paper, coated paper, glossy photo paper, proo???ng paper, and CAD paper), refer to the Paper Reference Guide. The Paper Reference Guide identi???es types of paper and gives speci???cations, printer driver settings, and tips on handling paper. (See Paper Reference Guide.)

By downloading the latest version of the Media Con???guration Tool from the imagePROGRAF website, you can make sure the paper information indicated in the Paper Reference Guide, on the printer Control Panel, and in the printer driver is up to date.

Accessing the Paper Reference Guide from imagePROGRAF Support Information

The Paper Reference Guide can also be accessed from imagePROGRAF Support Information. Follow these instructions, as appropriate for your operating system.

???Windows

1.Double-click the iPFxxxx Support desktop icon. (iPFxxxx indicates the printer model.)

The imagePROGRAF Support Information window is displayed.

2.Click the Paper Reference Guide button.

Handling Paper 95

Paper

The Paper Reference Guide is displayed.

???Mac OS X

1.Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock.

The imagePROGRAF Support Information window is displayed.

2.Click the Paper Reference Guide button.

96 Handling Paper

Paper

The Paper Reference Guide is displayed.

Handling Paper 97

Paper

Updating paper information

To update the paper information in the Paper Reference Guide and on the printer, download the latest version of the Media Con???guration Tool from the imagePROGRAF website. For information about the Media Con???guration Tool, see Media Con???guration Tool (Windows) or Media Con???guration Tool (Macintosh).

The imagePROGRAF website is accessible from imagePROGRAF Support Information.

Important

???When you use the Media Con???guration Tool to update information about paper, the types of paper on the printer Control Panel, in the printer driver, and in related software are updated.

???Windows

1.Double-click the iPFxxxx Support desktop icon. (iPFxxxx indicates the printer model.)

The imagePROGRAF Support Information window is displayed.

2.Click Visit the imagePROGRAF webpage.

The default browser on your computer is started and the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed.

98 Handling Paper

Paper

???Mac OS X

1.Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock.

The imagePROGRAF Support Information window is displayed.

2.Click Visit the imagePROGRAF webpage.

The default browser on your computer is started and the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed.

Handling Paper 99

Paper

Paper Sizes

Rolls

Rolls that meet the following conditions are supported.

???Outer diameter: Up to 150 mm (6 in)

???Inner diameter of paper core: 2 or 3 inches

???Printing side out

*1: For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

100 Handling Paper

Paper

Sheets

Sheets of the following sizes are supported.

Handling Paper 101

Paper

Note

???For details on non-standard paper sizes, see ???Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes???. (???P.261)

???Borderless printing is not supported on sheets.

102 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Handling rolls

Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls

When printing on rolls, attach the Roll Holder to the roll.

Rolls have a two- or three-inch paper core. Use the correct attachment for the paper core. The printer comes equipped with the 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment installed.

Caution

???Set the roll on a table or other ???at surface so that it does not roll or fall. Rolls are heavy, and dropping a roll may cause injury.

Important

???When handling the roll, be careful not to soil the printing surface. This may affect the printing quality. We recommend wearing clean cloth gloves when handling rolls to protect the printing surface.

???Use scissors or a cutting tool to cut the edge of the roll paper if it is uneven, dirty, or has tape residue. Otherwise, it may cause feeding problems and affect the printing quality. Be careful not to cut through any barcodes printed on the roll.

???Align the edges of the paper on both ends of the roll. Misalignment may cause feeding problems.

Note

???For details on supported sizes and types of rolls, see ???Paper Sizes??? or the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.100) (???P.95)

???To view instructions as you attach the Roll Holder, press the Navigate button. (???P.29)

Handling Paper 103

Using rolls with a 2-inch paper core

Handling rolls

1. Lift the Holder Stopper lever (a) from the shaft side to unlock it. Holding the Holder Stopper at the position indicated (b), remove it from the Roll Holder.

2. Insert the respective attachments for the roll paper core on the Roll Holder and Holder Stopper.

???

??? Using rolls with a 3-inch paper core

104 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

3. With the edge of the roll paper facing forward as shown, insert the Roll Holder from the right of the roll. Insert it ???rmly until the roll touches the ???ange (a) of the Roll Holder, leaving no gap.

4. Insert the Holder Stopper from the left in the Roll Holder as shown. Holding it at the position shown (b), push it ???rmly in until the ???ange (a) of the Holder Stopper touches the roll. Lock the Holder Stopper lever (c) by pushing it down toward the shaft side.

Handling Paper 105

Handling rolls

Loading Rolls in the Printer

Follow these steps to load rolls in the printer.

Note

???Before loading rolls, make sure the printer is clean inside the Top Cover and around the Ejection Guide. If these areas are dirty, we recommend cleaning them in advance. (???P.647)

1.Press the Load button.

2.Press ??? or ??? to select Load Roll Paper, and then press the OK button.

Note

???If any paper has been advanced that will not be used, a message is shown requesting you to remove it.

Press ??? or ??? to select Yes, and then press the OK button. Remove the paper and go to the next step.

3.Positioning your hands as shown, open the Roll Cover.

106 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

4. Holding the Roll Holder ???ange (a), rest the Roll Holder shaft on the Roll Ledge (b).

At this time, position the holder so that the ???R??? label (c) on the Roll Holder ???ange is aligned with the ???R??? label (d) on the printer .

5. Holding the Roll Holder ???ange (a), guide the holder along the Roll Loading Slots (b) on both ends, keeping the holder level as you load it in the Roll Holder Slot.

Caution

???Do not force the Roll Holder into the printer with the right and left ends reversed. This may damage the printer and Roll Holder.

???Do not release the ???anges until the holder is loaded in the Roll Holder Slot.

???Be careful not to pinch your ???ngers between the Roll Loading Slots (b) and the Roll Holder shaft

(c) when loading rolls.

Handling Paper 107

Handling rolls

6.

7.

Advance the roll to insert the leading edge in the Paper Feed Slot (a) until you hear a tone.

Important

???Be careful not to soil the printing surface of roll paper as you insert it in the slot. This may affect the printing quality. We recommend wearing clean cloth gloves when handling rolls to protect the printing surface.

???If the paper is wrinkled or warped, straighten it out before loading it.

???Load paper straight so it is not fed askew.

Once paper feeding starts, you will need to do the following, based on the ManageRemainRoll

setting and the barcode printed on rolls. (???P.126)

Note

??? For details on types of paper to select, see the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

108 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

8. Holding it at the positions indicated, close the Roll Cover.

Note

???Cut the edge of the roll after the paper is advanced if it is soiled or if there are cuts from scissors or the blade after removing creased edges. (???P.129)

Handling Paper 109

Handling rolls

Changing the Type of Paper

Follow these steps to change the type of paper speci???ed on the printer after you have loaded paper.

If you will continue using this type of paper later, selecting Keep Paper Type > On will save the time and effort of con???guring the media type setting when you load the paper again. The current media type settings before you select On will be automatically selected at that time. (???P.111)

Important

???For best printing results, the printer ???ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper. Be sure to select the type of paper to use correctly before printing.

???Because the printer ???ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper, the margins and the size of printed images may vary depending on the type of paper used. If margins and the size of images are not as you expected, adjust the paper feed amount.

(???P.612)

Changing the Type of Paper

Note

???After you load a roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the type of paper on the Display Screen. Select the type of paper and press the OK button.

If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to On, specify the roll length after the type of paper. (???P.112)

1.On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Chg. Paper Type, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select the type of paper loaded (Roll Paper or Cut Sheet), and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.

Note

???For details on types of paper, see the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95) By default, Plain Paper is selected.

???If you move the Release Lever, the setting automatically reverts to the previously selected paper.

???Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may cause feed errors and affect printing quality.

110 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Using the Same Type of Paper Regularly

Con???gure this setting so that current media type settings will be automatically selected when you load the same type of paper later.

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Keep Paper Type, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select On, and then press the OK button.

Note

???The speci???ed media type setting is updated in the following situations.

???When using sheets, if you send a print job before loading a sheet, the media type setting is updated to match the type of paper speci???ed by the print job.

???When you have selected ManageRemainRoll > On on the Control Panel and a barcode is printed on the roll, the media type setting is updated to match the type of paper speci???ed by the barcode.

???To change the media type setting, see ???Changing the Type of Paper???. (???P.110)

Handling Paper 111

Handling rolls

Specifying the Paper Length

When changing the length of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the length as follows.

Note

??? Specify the paper length when you have set ManageRemainRoll to On. (???P.126)

1.On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Chg. Paper Size, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select Roll Length, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select the length of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button. Specify the roll length as follows.

1. Press the ??? or ??? button to move to the next ???eld for input.

2. Press the ??? or ??? button to enter the value.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to ???nish entering the value, and then press the OK button.

112 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Printing From a Desired Starting Point

When printing inside boundaries or in other situations when you want to specify a particular position to start printing from, set Width Detection to Off in the printer menu for the type of paper used.

Set Width Detection to Off

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Paper Details, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Width Detection, and then press the OK button.

6.Press ??? or ??? to select Off, and then press the OK button.

Load paper in the desired position to start printing from

Follow these instructions to load paper at the desired starting position for printing when Width Detection is Off.

1. If you did not send a print job in advance, a menu for selection of the type of paper is displayed. Press ??? or ??? to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

Note

???If a print job was received before paper was advanced, the media type and size speci???ed by the job are shown on the Display Screen.

Thus, this screen is not displayed. Go to step 2.

2.Width Detection OFF. OK to continue? is now shown on the Display Screen. Press ??? or ??? to select Leave OFF, and then press the OK button.

3.After a menu for selection of the paper size is displayed, press ??? or ??? to select the paper size, and then press the OK button.

Handling Paper 113

Handling rolls

4. Open the Top Cover and check the position where paper is loaded.

To start printing from the current position, close the Top Cover.

To reposition the paper, push the Release Lever back.

5. Keeping the right edge of the paper aligned with the extended line of the Paper Alignment Line

(a) to the right of the ejection guide and the leading edge aligned with the groove (b) at the far end of the Platen, load the paper at the position from which to start printing.

114 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

6. Pull the Release Lever forward and close the Top Cover.

Handling Paper 115

Handling rolls

Removing the Roll from the Printer

Remove rolls from the printer as follows.

Note

??? If you need to cut the roll, see ???Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls???. (???P.129)

1.On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Eject Paper, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select Yes, and then press the OK button. The roll is now rewound and ejected.

Caution

???If you have selected ManageRemainRoll > On in the Control Panel menu, a barcode is printed on the leading edge of the roll.

Do not remove the roll before the barcode is printed. You will be unable to keep track of the amount of roll paper left. (???P.126)

5. Positioning your hands as shown, open the Roll Cover.

116 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

6.

7.

Using both hands, rotate the Roll Holder toward the back to rewind the roll.

Holding the Roll Holder ???ange (a), remove the holder from the Roll Holder Slot.

Note

???For instructions on removing the Roll Holder from rolls, see ???Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls???. (???P.118)

8.Holding it at the positions indicated, close the Roll Cover.

Note

??? To load new paper in the printer at this point, see ???Loading Rolls in the Printer???. (???P.106)

Handling Paper 117

3-Inch Paper Core Attachment R (Roll Holder side)
3-Inch Paper Core Attachment L (Holder Stopper side)

Handling rolls

Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls

1. Lift the Holder Stopper lever (a) from the shaft side to unlock it. Holding the Holder Stopper at the position indicated (b), remove it from the Roll Holder.

2. Remove the Roll Holder from the roll.

3. When removing attachments, push the tips (a) in as you remove the attachment.

???

???

118 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

??? 2-Inch Paper Core Attachment

Important

???Store the roll in the original bag or box, away from high temperature, humidity, and direct sunlight. If paper is not stored properly, the printing surface may become scratched, which may affect the printing quality when you use it again.

Handling Paper 119

Handling rolls

Clearing Jammed Roll Paper

If paper from a roll becomes jammed, Paper jam. is shown on the Display Screen of the Control Panel. Remove the jammed paper as follows.

1. Open the Roll Cover. Use a commercially available cutter or the like to cut the paper of the loaded roll.

Caution

???When cutting paper, be careful to avoid injury or damage to the printer.

2.Push the Release Lever back.

3. Remove the jammed paper.

???If paper is jammed inside the Top Cover

1.Open the Top Cover and move the Carriage to the left or right side manually, away from the jam.

2.Clear any jammed paper from inside the Top Cover.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.

120 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

3. Close the Top Cover.

Important

???Do not move the Carriage over jammed paper. This may damage the Printhead.

???Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b). This may stain your hands and damage the printer.

???If paper from a roll is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot

1.Open the Roll Cover.

2.Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.

Handling Paper 121

Handling rolls

???If the paper is jammed by the Ejection Guide Remove the jammed paper from the Output Tray.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.

4. Pull the Release Lever forward.

122 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)

Follow these steps to remove any scraps left in the Paper Feed Slot after you clear jammed sheets or roll paper.

1. Turn the printer off. (???P.24)

2. Push the Release Lever back.

3. Positioning your hands as shown, open the Roll Cover.

4. Fold an A4 sheet lengthwise four times and insert it through the gap of the Paper Feed Slot. Push the scrap out toward the Platen.

5. Remove the scrap when it is pushed out onto the Platen.

6. If any scraps remain inside the paper feed slot, repeat steps 4 and 5.

Handling Paper 123

Handling rolls

7. Holding it at the positions indicated, close the Roll Cover.

8. Pull the Release Lever forward.

124 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Feeding Roll Paper Manually

After a roll has been advanced, you can press the Feed button to feed or retract the roll with the ??? and ??? buttons.

1. Press the Feed button.

2. Press the ??? or ??? button to advance or retract the roll. Press ??? to retract the roll manually.

Press ??? to advance the roll manually.

Note

???If you hold down ??? or ??? for less than a second, the roll will move about 1 mm (0.04 in).

If you hold down ??? or ??? for more than a second, the roll will move until you release the button. Release the button when the Display Screen indicates End of paper feed. Cannot feed paper more..

Handling Paper 125

Handling rolls

Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left

Setting ManageRemainRoll to On in the Paper Menu of the Control Panel will print a barcode with text on the roll when the roll is removed that identi???es the type of paper and amount left. When ManageRemainRoll is On and you load rolls with printed barcodes, the type of paper and amount left are automatically detected after rolls are loaded. The barcode will be cut off after it has been read.

Important

???Because the ManageRemainRoll function is not compatible with clear ???lm, an error message may be displayed (The roll is empty.) after you load clear ???lm. For this reason, set ManageRemainRoll to Off before loading clear ???lm.

???If the barcode on the roll is not detected, enter the type and length of paper on the Control Panel.

Follow these steps to set ManageRemainRoll to On as follows.

1.

2.

3.

4.

On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

??? If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

Press ??? or ??? to select ManageRemainRoll, and then press the OK button. Press ??? or ??? to select On, and then press the OK button.

126 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls

When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere, if the Cutter touches printed surfaces that are still wet, it may damage the paper or cause rough cut edges. Also, ink may be transferred onto the paper surface during ejection, soiling it. You can prevent problems by adjusting the drying time after printing before the paper is cut.

Windows

1. Display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.348)

2. Select the Main sheet and click C Advanced Settings in A Media Type.

3. In the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box displayed next, select the desired settings values in B

Between Pages and C Between Scans in A Drying Time, and then click OK.

(???P.354)

Handling Paper 127

Handling rolls

Mac OS X

1. Choose Print in the application menu.

2. Select the Main pane and click C Settings in A Media Type.

3. In the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box displayed next, select the desired settings values in

C Between Pages and D Between Scans in B Drying Time, and then click OK.

(???P.465)

Note

???By factory default, Drying Time is deactivated (Off) for all paper types.

???To have the printer wait for ink to dry immediately after printing without releasing paper, set Cutting Mode to Eject in the printer menu.

(???P.129)

128 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls

How rolls are cut after ejection varies depending on printer settings.

Note

???Automatic and Eject are valid only when you have selected Auto Cut > Yes in the printer driver.

???With Eject, printing does not resume after a series of jobs have been printed continuously until the roll is cut.

???Eject is the preset selection in Cutting Mode for some types of paper. For this paper, we recommend keeping the preset cutting mode.

Cut rolls manually in the following cases:

Handling Paper 129

Handling rolls

Eject (waiting for ink to dry after printing)

Important

???When cutting wide printed documents after ejection, have two people support the documents. If the paper drops, printed documents may be damaged.

???Do not lift the paper when holding printed documents before cutting. If the paper rises, it may affect the printing quality or cause rough cut edges.

1.On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button. The Paper Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Paper Details, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Cutting Mode, and then press the OK button.

6.Press ??? or ??? to select Eject, and then press the OK button.

7.Starts printing.

When printing is ???nished, the printer will stop without cutting.

8.Holding the printed document to prevent it from dropping, press the Cut button to cut the roll.

130 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Manual (when using media that cannot be cut with the Cutter Unit)

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button. The Paper Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Paper Details, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Cutting Mode, and then press the OK button.

6.Press ??? or ??? to select Manual, and then press the OK button.

7.Starts printing.

The printer stops advancing the paper after printing.

8.Press the Feed button.

Roll paper is fed to the speci???ed cut position and then automatically stopped.

9.Cut the roll paper manually with scissors or the like.

Handling Paper 131

Handling rolls

10. Press the OK button.

After the roll is rewound, it stops automatically.

Paper cutting (to have the roll cut at your speci???ed position)

1. Press the Feed button.

2. Press the ??? button to advance the roll to the position for cutting.

3. Press the Cut button.

4. Press ??? or ??? to select Yes, and then press the OK button. After the roll paper is cut, it is rewound automatically.

Caution

???If paper would be short when cut at a particular position, the roll may automatically be advanced in some cases before cutting.

132 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically

If the leading edge of a roll is crooked or warped, it may cause an error message or printing problems. In this case, set Trim Edge First to Automatic or On in the Paper Menu on the Control Panel to have the printer cut the leading edge to make the edge straight after you load a roll.

Trim Edge First offers the following options.

???Automatic

If the left and right side of the leading edge of the roll ((a) and (b)) are uneven by 3 mm (0.12 in) or more when you load the roll, the edge is cut an amount relative to the slant to ensure a straight edge, and scraps are removed. The edge is not cut if the unevenness is less than 3 mm. However, paper may sometimes be cut, depending on the state of the leading edge.

???Off

The edge is not cut and scraps are not removed. This setting is Off for most types of paper, by default. For more information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

???On

The leading edge is cut off when you load a roll, and scraps are removed. The amount of paper cut from the leading edge varies depending on the type of paper. For more information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

Follow these steps to change the Trim Edge First setting.

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Paper Details, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Trim Edge First, and then press the OK button.

6.Press ??? or ??? to select the desired setting option, and then press the OK button. This setting takes effect the next time you load a roll.

Handling Paper 133

Handling rolls

Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls

For media such as Backlit Film that are more likely to generate debris when cut, select CutDustReduct. > On in the Paper Menu of the Control Panel. This option reduces debris from cutting by printing black lines at the leading and trailing edges of documents. It may help prevent Printhead damage. You can specify for CutDustReduct. to be activated for particular types of paper.

Important

???Do not set CutDustReduct. to On for paper that wrinkles easily, such as Plain Paper or lightweight paper. This may impair cutting and cause paper jams.

???Borderless printing is not available when CutDustReduct. is set to On. To use borderless printing, select CutDustReduct. > Off.

Set CutDustReduct. to On as follows.

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Paper Details, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select CutDustReduct., and then press the OK button.

6.Press ??? or ??? to select On, and then press the OK button.

134 Handling Paper

Handling rolls

Roll Holder Set

Load a roll on the roll holder and then load the holder in the printer. The Roll Holder in the Roll Holder Set RH2-33 is for use with both 2-inch and 3-inch paper cores. Use the correct attachment for the particular paper core. (???P.103)

???Roll Holder Set RH2-33

???Roll Holder (for 2- and 3-inch paper cores)

??? Attachments

Handling Paper 135

Handling sheets

Handling sheets

Loading Sheets in the Printer

Follow these steps to load sheets in the printer.

Important

???One sheet of paper can be loaded in the Paper Feed Slot at a time. Do not load more than one sheet at a time. This may cause paper jams.

???Before feeding paper or printing, make sure the sheet is ???at against the Roll Cover. The sheet may jam if it curls before feeding or printing and the trailing edge drops toward the front.

Note

???Store unused paper in the original package, away from high temperature, humidity, and direct sunlight.

???Paper that is wrinkled or warped may jam. If necessary, straighten the paper and reload it.

???Load the paper straight. Loading paper askew will cause an error.

1.Select sheets as the paper source.

???If a print job was received

Sheets are automatically selected, and the media type and size speci???ed by the print job are shown on the Display Screen. Go to the next step.

???If no print job was received

1.Press the Load button.

2.Press ??? or ??? to select Load Cut Sheet, and then press the OK button.

Note

???If any paper has been advanced that will not be used, a message is shown requesting you to remove it.

Press ??? or ??? to select Yes, and then press the OK button. Remove the paper and go to the next step.

136 Handling Paper

Handling sheets

2. Slide the Width Guide (a) to align it with the mark for the size of paper you will load.

3. Load a single sheet printing-side up in the Paper Feed Slot, with the right edge aligned with the Paper Alignment Guide (a) to the right of the Roll Cover.

Insert the paper until the leading edge makes contact and you hear a tone.

Handling Paper 137

Handling sheets

4. Move the Width Guide (a) carefully to match the size of paper loaded.

Set the Width Guide against the edge of the paper to prevent the paper from becoming crooked or wrinkled.

5. Press the OK button.

???If a print job was received

The printer now starts printing the print job.

???If no print job was received

A menu for selection of the type of paper is automatically shown on the Display Screen. Press ??? or ??? to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

The printer now starts feeding the paper.

Note

??? For details on types of paper to select, see the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

138 Handling Paper

Handling sheets

Changing the Type of Paper

Follow these steps to change the type of paper speci???ed on the printer after you have loaded paper.

If you will continue using this type of paper later, selecting Keep Paper Type > On will save the time and effort of con???guring the media type setting when you load the paper again. The current media type settings before you select On will be automatically selected at that time. (???P.111)

Important

???For best printing results, the printer ???ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper. Be sure to select the type of paper to use correctly before printing.

???Because the printer ???ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper, the margins and the size of printed images may vary depending on the type of paper used. If margins and the size of images are not as you expected, adjust the paper feed amount.

(???P.612)

Changing the Type of Paper

Note

???After you load a roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the type of paper on the Display Screen. Select the type of paper and press the OK button.

If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to On, specify the roll length after the type of paper. (???P.112)

1.On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Chg. Paper Type, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select the type of paper loaded (Roll Paper or Cut Sheet), and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.

Note

???For details on types of paper, see the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95) By default, Plain Paper is selected.

???If you move the Release Lever, the setting automatically reverts to the previously selected paper.

???Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may cause feed errors and affect printing quality.

Handling Paper 139

Handling sheets

Using the Same Type of Paper Regularly

Con???gure this setting so that current media type settings will be automatically selected when you load the same type of paper later.

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Keep Paper Type, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select On, and then press the OK button.

Note

???The speci???ed media type setting is updated in the following situations.

???When using sheets, if you send a print job before loading a sheet, the media type setting is updated to match the type of paper speci???ed by the print job.

???When you have selected ManageRemainRoll > On on the Control Panel and a barcode is printed on the roll, the media type setting is updated to match the type of paper speci???ed by the barcode.

???To change the media type setting, see ???Changing the Type of Paper???. (???P.139)

140 Handling Paper

Handling sheets

Printing From a Desired Starting Point

When printing inside boundaries or in other situations when you want to specify a particular position to start printing from, set Width Detection to Off in the printer menu for the type of paper used.

Set Width Detection to Off

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Paper Details, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Width Detection, and then press the OK button.

6.Press ??? or ??? to select Off, and then press the OK button.

Handling Paper 141

Handling sheets

Load paper in the desired position to start printing from

Follow these instructions to load paper at the desired starting position for printing when Width Detection is Off.

1. If you did not send a print job in advance, a menu for selection of the type of paper is displayed. Press ??? or ??? to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

Note

???If a print job was received before paper was advanced, the media type and size speci???ed by the job are shown on the Display Screen.

Thus, this screen is not displayed. Go to step 2.

2.Width Detection OFF. OK to continue? is now shown on the Display Screen. Press ??? or ??? to select Leave OFF, and then press the OK button.

3.After a menu for selection of the paper size is displayed, press ??? or ??? to select the paper size, and then press the OK button.

4.Open the Top Cover and check the position where paper is loaded.

To start printing from the current position, close the Top Cover.

To reposition the paper, push the Release Lever back.

142 Handling Paper

Handling sheets

5. Keeping the right edge of the paper aligned with the extended line of the Paper Alignment Line

(a) to the right of the ejection guide and the leading edge aligned with the groove (b) at the far end of the Platen, load the paper at the position from which to start printing.

6. Pull the Release Lever forward and close the Top Cover.

Handling Paper 143

Handling sheets

Removing Sheets

Remove sheets from the printer as follows.

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Eject Paper, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select Yes, and then press the OK button. The paper is ejected from the front of the printer.

5.Holding the paper, push the Release Lever back and remove the sheet.

6. Pull the Release Lever forward.

144 Handling Paper

Handling sheets

Clearing a Jammed Sheet

If a sheet becomes jammed, Paper jam. is shown on the Display Screen of the Control Panel. Remove the jammed paper as follows.

1. Push the Release Lever back.

2. Remove the jammed paper.

???If paper is jammed inside the Top Cover

1.Open the Top Cover and move the Carriage to the left or right side manually, away from the jam.

2.Clear any jammed paper from inside the Top Cover.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.

3.Close the Top Cover.

Handling Paper 145

Handling sheets

Important

???Do not move the Carriage over jammed paper. This may damage the Printhead.

???Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b). This may stain your hands and damage the printer.

???If the paper is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.

???If the paper is jammed by the Ejection Guide Remove the jammed paper from the Output Tray.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.

146 Handling Paper

Handling sheets

3. Pull the Release Lever forward.

Handling Paper 147

Handling sheets

Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)

Follow these steps to remove any scraps left in the Paper Feed Slot after you clear jammed sheets or roll paper.

1. Turn the printer off. (???P.24)

2. Push the Release Lever back.

3. Positioning your hands as shown, open the Roll Cover.

4. Fold an A4 sheet lengthwise four times and insert it through the gap of the Paper Feed Slot. Push the scrap out toward the Platen.

5. Remove the scrap when it is pushed out onto the Platen.

6. If any scraps remain inside the paper feed slot, repeat steps 4 and 5.

148 Handling Paper

Handling sheets

7.

8.

Holding it at the positions indicated, close the Roll Cover.

Pull the Release Lever forward.

Handling Paper 149

Output Stacker

Output Stacker

Using the Output Stacker

The Output Stacker can be held at two positions, as shown.

???When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker Use position (1).

???When the Output Stacker is not used, or when moving the printer Use position (2).

When moving the printer, lift the Support Rod to the Extended position. (???P.151)

Important

???When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker, always use it in position (1). If you do not, printed documents may not be dropped into the Output Stacker, and the printed surface may become soiled.

???When moving the printer, always lift the Support Rod to the Extended position before use in position (2). If the stacker is not used in position (2), the Basket Cloth may touch the ???oor and be soiled or damaged.

???The Output Stacker can hold one sheet. When printing multiple pages, remove each sheet after it is printed.

150 Handling Paper

Output Stacker

Note regarding the Extended position

The Output Stacker can be used in the regular position and an Extended position for easy removal of printed documents.

For information on types of paper you can use with the stacker in Extended position, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

Switch the stacker to Extended position as follows.

1. Lift the Support Rod to the position shown (a) and switch the stacker to Extended position.

2. When using rolls larger than A1 or 24 inches wide, pull out the Adjustable Stopper.

Handling Paper 151

Printing Photos and Images

Working With Various Print Jobs

Printing Photos and Images

Printing Photos and Images

Printing is easy when you simply choose the print target.

Easy Settings

Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.

Print Target

Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.

Print targets for photos and images

Caution

??? Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may not be available.

Note

???You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.

???You can also ???ne-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)

For details on Advanced Settings, see ???Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing???. (???P.187)

152 Working With Various Print Jobs

Printing Photos and Images

Print Quality

Choose the print quality.

The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.

For instructions on printing photos and images, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Printing Photos and Images (Windows) (???P.154)

???Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X) (???P.156)

Working With Various Print Jobs 153

Printing Photos and Images

Printing Photos and Images (Windows)

This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.

???Document: Photo image from a digital camera

???Page size: 10??12 inches (254.0??304.8 mm)

???Paper: Roll

???Paper type: Premium Glossy Paper 200

???Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Premium

Glossy Paper 200.

In the A Media Type, choose the type of paper used for printing, such as Glossy Paper, Coated Paper, and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.

Note

???The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel) is updated when you install the Media Con???guration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Con???guration Tool. For details, see Media Con???guration Tool.

5.After con???rming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Color) in the E Print Target list.

Note

???You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View Settings.

154 Working With Various Print Jobs

Printing Photos and Images

6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the application. In this case, click 10"x12".

8. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

9. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 10-in. Roll (254.0mm), and then click OK.

10. Specify additional printing conditions.

For details on available printing conditions,see ???Printer Driver Settings (Windows)???. (???P.336)

11. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For instructions on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Working With Various Print Jobs 155

Printing Photos and Images

Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.

???Document: Photo image from a digital camera

???Page size: 10??12 inches (254.0??304.8 mm)

???Paper: Roll paper

???Paper type: Premium Glossy Paper 200

???Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

156 Working With Various Print Jobs

Printing Photos and Images

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Premium Glossy Paper 200.

Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.

Note

???The types of paper indicated in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel) are updated when you install the Media Con???guration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Con???guration Tool. For details, see Media Con???guration Tool.

7.After con???rming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Color) in the E Print Target list.

Note

???For information on settings optimized for printing photos and images, see ???Printing Photos and Images???. (???P.152)

???You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View set..

8.Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

9.Access the Page Setup pane.

10. Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.

Working With Various Print Jobs 157

Printing Photos and Images

11. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list-in this case, 10 in. (254.0mm).

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as speci???ed in C

Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".

13. Specify additional printing conditions.

For details on available printing conditions, see ???Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.454)

14. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

158 Working With Various Print Jobs

Printing CAD Drawings

Printing CAD Drawings

Printing CAD Drawings

Using this printer, you can print ???ne lines and text clearly and sharply. It???s easy to produce highly precise drawings from CAD applications.

Note

???In Windows, you can print highly precise drawings using the provided imagePROGRAF HDI Driver for AutoCAD/AutoCAD LT.

For details on the HDI driver, see the HDI Driver Guide.

For instructions on CAD printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) (???P.162)

???Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X) (???P.164)

Working With Various Print Jobs 159

Printing CAD Drawings

Printing Line Drawings and Text

Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.

Easy Settings

Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.

Print Target

Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.

Print targets for line drawings and text

Note

???You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.

???You can also ???ne-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)

For details on Advanced Settings, see ???Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing???. (???P.187)

160 Working With Various Print Jobs

Printing CAD Drawings

Print Quality

Choose the print quality.

The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.

For instructions on printing line drawings and text, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) (???P.162)

???Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X) (???P.164)

Working With Various Print Jobs 161

Printing CAD Drawings

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)

This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.

???Document: CAD drawing

???Page size: A3 (297.0 ?? 420.0 mm [11.7 ?? 16.5 in])

???Paper: Roll paper

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5. After con???rming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Color Line Drawing) or CAD

(Monochrome Line Drawing) in the E Print Target list.

Note

???You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View Settings.

6.Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

162 Working With Various Print Jobs

Printing CAD Drawings

7. In A Page Size, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the application. In this case, click

ISO A3.

8. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

9. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).

10. Specify additional printing conditions.

For details on available printing conditions, see ???Printer Driver Settings (Windows)???. (???P.336)

11. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Working With Various Print Jobs 163

Printing CAD Drawings

Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.

???Document: CAD drawing

???Page size: A3 (297.0 ?? 420.0 mm [11.7 ?? 16.5 in])

???Paper: Roll

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

164 Working With Various Print Jobs

Printing CAD Drawings

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

7. After con???rming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Color Line Drawing) or CAD

(Monochrome Line Drawing) in the E Print Target list.

Note

???You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View set..

8.Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

9.Access the Page Setup pane.

10. Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.

Working With Various Print Jobs 165

Printing CAD Drawings

11. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list-in this case, ISO

A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as speci???ed in C

Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A3.

13. Specify additional printing conditions.

For details on available printing conditions, see ???Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.454)

14. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

166 Working With Various Print Jobs

Printing CAD Drawings

Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings

You can complete color settings when Color (CAD) is selected in Color Mode.

Colors can be adjusted before printing as follows when Color Compatibility is selected.

Note

???Color (CAD) is displayed when you select Advanced Settings on the Main sheet and set Print Priority to Line Drawing/Text.

Color Compatibility

Color Setting Item

Important

???If you have selected Color (CAD) 3, Color (CAD) 4, or Color (CAD) 5, it is not possible to match the colors and image quality produced by the speci???ed printer exactly.

For instructions on con???guring Color Compatibility, refer to the following topics.

??? Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows) (???P.168)

Working With Various Print Jobs 167

Printing CAD Drawings

Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings (Windows)

You can complete color settings when Color (CAD) is selected in Color Mode.

Note

???Color (CAD) is displayed when you select Advanced Settings on the Main sheet and set Print Priority to Line Drawing/Text.

1.Click start > Printers and Faxes (or Printers).

2.Select the printer, and then display the printer properties dialog box.

3. Click the Device Settings tab to display the Device Settings sheet.

4. Click A Color Compatibility to display the Color Compatibility dialog box.

168 Working With Various Print Jobs

Printing CAD Drawings

5. Select the desired color settings in the A Color Compatibility list.

Note

??? For details on color settings,see ???Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings???. (???P.167)

For printing instructions, refer to the following topic.

??? Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) (???P.190)

Working With Various Print Jobs 169

Printing CAD Drawings

HP-GL/2 Printing

This printer supports the original Canon GARO printer control language as well as HP-GL/2 and HP RTL(*1) emulation.(*2) When printing from applications that support HP-GL/2 output, specify HP-GL/2 in the application???s plotter output settings.

Note

??? For instructions on con???guring these settings, refer to the software documentation.

The printer automatically switches to the corresponding processing depending on whether a GARO, HP-GL/2, or HP RTL job is received. Con???gure the optional settings for HP-GL/2 emulation on the printer control panel. (???P.49)

This printer can emulate the following printers using HP-GL/2 emulation.

Emulated Printers

*1: HP-GL/2: Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language 2; HP RTL: Hewlett-Packard Raster Transfer Language

*2: It may not be possible to print jobs with excessively large amounts of data correctly.

170 Working With Various Print Jobs

Printing Of???ce Documents

Printing Of???ce Documents

Printing Of???ce Documents

Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.

Easy Settings

Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.

Print Target

Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.

Print targets for of???ce documents

Note

???You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.

???You can also ???ne-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)

For details on Advanced Settings, see ???Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing???. (???P.187)

Print Quality

Choose the print quality.

The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.

For instructions on printing of???ce documents, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Printing Of???ce Documents (Windows) (???P.172)

???Printing Of???ce Documents (Mac OS X) (???P.174)

Working With Various Print Jobs 171

Printing Of???ce Documents

Printing Of???ce Documents (Windows)

This topic describes how to print of???ce documents based on the following example.

???Document: Of???ce document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs

???Page size: A4 (210.0 ?? 297.0 mm [8.3 ?? 11.7 in])

???Paper: Sheets

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Paper size: A4 (210.0 ?? 297.0 mm [8.3 ?? 11.7 in])

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5. After con???rming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Of???ce Document in the E Print

Target list.

Note

???You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View Settings.

6.Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

172 Working With Various Print Jobs

Printing Of???ce Documents

7. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the application. In this case, click ISO A4.

8. Click Manual in the L Paper Source list.

9. Specify additional printing conditions.

For details on available printing conditions, see ???Printer Driver Settings (Windows)???. (???P.336)

10. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Caution

??? Depending on the A Media Type setting, some E Print Target options may not be available.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Working With Various Print Jobs 173

Printing Of???ce Documents

Printing Of???ce Documents (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print of???ce documents based on the following example.

???Document: Of???ce document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs

???Page size: A4 (210.0 ?? 297.0 mm [8.3 ?? 11.7 in])

???Paper: Sheets

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Paper size: A4 (210.0 ?? 297.0 mm [8.3 ?? 11.7 in])

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - for Paper Tray (Large Margins).

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

174 Working With Various Print Jobs

Printing Of???ce Documents

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

7. After con???rming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Of???ce Document in the E Print

Target list.

Note

???You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View set..

8.Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

9.Access the Page Setup pane.

10. Click Manual in the A Paper Source list.

11. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the

Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 - for Paper Tray (Large Margins).

Working With Various Print Jobs 175

Printing Of???ce Documents

12. Specify additional printing conditions.

For details on available printing conditions, see ???Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.454)

13. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

176 Working With Various Print Jobs

Adjusting Images

Enhanced Printing Options

Adjusting Images

Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver

Color settings speci???ed in the application for your documents are essentially given priority over other settings for each print job, but further color adjustment is possible in the printer driver.

Color Mode

Choose how the printer driver processes color, as desired.

The available options vary depending on the color mode.

Enhanced Printing Options 177

Adjusting Images

Color Adjustment

You can adjust colors separately for images, graphics, and text documents.

Note

???Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adjustment dialog box, which allows you to select the color adjustment target from Image, Graphics, and Text.

178 Enhanced Printing Options

Adjusting Images

Matching

You can choose the color-matching mode and method.

By adjusting the color-matching mode and method, you can make printed colors match the colors of on-screen images more closely.

Enhanced Printing Options 179

Adjusting Images

Note

???Be sure to calibrate your monitor colors correctly if you adjust the colors for printing. If monitor colors are not calibrated correctly, you may not obtain the desired printing results. For instructions on monitor calibration, refer to the documentation for your monitor and operating system.

For instructions on color adjustment, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) (???P.181)

???Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X) (???P.184)

180 Enhanced Printing Options

Adjusting Images

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to ???ne-tune the color tone of photos before printing.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.

2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

5. Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.

6. Click Color in the G Color Mode list.

Enhanced Printing Options 181

Adjusting Images

7. Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.

8. On the Color Adjustment sheet, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.

Note

???Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adjustment dialog box, which allows you to select the color adjustment target from Image, Graphics, and Text.

9.Close the Color Settings dialog box.

182 Enhanced Printing Options

Adjusting Images

10. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

11. Con???rm the settings of A Page Size, L Paper Source, and so on.

12. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Enhanced Printing Options 183

Adjusting Images

Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X)

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to ???ne-tune the color tone of photos before printing.

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. Choose the original size in the F Paper Size list.

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

5. Access the Main pane.

184 Enhanced Printing Options

Adjusting Images

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

7. Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.

8. Click Color in the H Color Mode list.

9. Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.

Enhanced Printing Options 185

Adjusting Images

10. On the Color Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.

Note

???Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adjustment dialog box, which allows you to select the color adjustment target from Image, Graphics, and Text.

11.Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.

12.Access the Page Setup pane.

13. Con???rm the settings of A Paper Source and C Page Size.

14. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

186 Enhanced Printing Options

Adjusting Images

Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing

You can specify detailed print settings as desired for the quality level, colors, and other criteria.

Advanced Settings

For printing results that appear just as expected for your original, you can specify which graphic elements and colors to prioritize for printing.

Note

???Easy Settings are also available, providing convenient presets. To use the presets, simply choose the printing application.

For details on Easy Settings, refer to the following topics.

???Printing Photos and Images (???P.152)

???Printing Line Drawings and Text (???P.160)

???Printing Of???ce Documents (???P.171)

Print Priority

Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.

*1: Options suitable for the selected type of paper are listed under Print Priority.

Print Quality

Choose the print quality.

The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.

Enhanced Printing Options 187

Adjusting Images

*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Print Quality.

Color Settings

*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Color Mode.

*2: The order of options displayed varies depending on the operating system.

188 Enhanced Printing Options

Note

???To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality, and choose Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.

For instructions on specifying the print quality and color settings before printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) (???P.190)

???Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X) (???P.192)

Enhanced Printing Options 189

Adjusting Images

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions

(Windows)

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. As an example, this topic describes how to print CAD drawings as clearly as possible, with sharp lines and text.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.

2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

5. Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.

6. Click Line Drawing/Text in the E Print Priority list.

7. Click High (1200dpi) in the F Print Quality list.

Note

??? Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.

190 Enhanced Printing Options

Adjusting Images

8. Click Color (CAD) in the G Color Mode list.

9. To adjust the color, click H Color Settings.

Note

???For instructions on adjusting color,see ???Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver???. (???P.177)

10.Select the K Sharpen Text check box.

11.Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

12. Con???rm the settings of A Page Size, L Paper Source, and so on.

13. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Enhanced Printing Options 191

Adjusting Images

Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions

(Mac OS X)

You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. As an example, this topic describes how to print CAD drawings as clearly as possible, with sharp lines and text.

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. Choose the original size in the F Paper Size list.

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

192 Enhanced Printing Options

Adjusting Images

7. Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.

8. Click Line Drawing in the E Print Priority list.

9. Click High(1200dpi) in the F Print Quality list.

Note

???Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the type of paper.

10.Click Color (CAD) in the H Color Mode list.

11.To adjust the color, click I Set.

Note

???For instructions on adjusting color, see ???Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver???. (???P.177)

12.Access the Page Setup pane.

13. Con???rm the settings of A Paper Source and C Page Size.

14. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

Enhanced Printing Options 193

Choosing Paper for Printing

Choosing Paper for Printing

Choosing a Paper for Printing

Choosing the right paper for your particular printing application will give you the best printing results.

Media Type

The printer and printer driver offer print settings optimized for various paper characteristics.

Note

???For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

???The types of paper indicated in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel) are updated when you install the Media Con???guration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Con???guration Tool. For information about the Media Con???guration Tool, see the Media Con???guration Tool (Windows) or Media Con???guration Tool (Macintosh).

???An error message may be displayed on the printer Control Panel if the type of paper as speci???ed in the printer driver does not match the type speci???ed on the printer. Although you can print under these conditions, the printing results may not be suitable.

If the paper type is not listed for selection

If the type of paper loaded is not listed among the options for selection, try printing on Special 1, Special 2, and so on. Note that higher numbers in this setting enable more vivid colors but may also cause colors to run together.

For instructions on specifying the paper type before printing, refer to the following topics.

??? Changing the Type of Paper (???P.195)

194 Enhanced Printing Options

Choosing Paper for Printing

Changing the Type of Paper

Follow these steps to change the type of paper speci???ed on the printer after you have loaded paper.

If you will continue using this type of paper later, selecting Keep Paper Type > On will save the time and effort of con???guring the media type setting when you load the paper again. The current media type settings before you select On will be automatically selected at that time. (???P.111)

Important

???For best printing results, the printer ???ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper. Be sure to select the type of paper to use correctly before printing.

???Because the printer ???ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper, the margins and the size of printed images may vary depending on the type of paper used. If margins and the size of images are not as you expected, adjust the paper feed amount.

(???P.612)

Changing the Type of Paper

Note

???After you load a roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the type of paper on the Display Screen. Select the type of paper and press the OK button.

If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to On, specify the roll length after the type of paper. (???P.112)

1.On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Chg. Paper Type, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select the type of paper loaded (Roll Paper or Cut Sheet), and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.

Note

???For details on types of paper, see the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95) By default, Plain Paper is selected.

???If you move the Release Lever, the setting automatically reverts to the previously selected paper.

???Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may cause feed errors and affect printing quality.

Enhanced Printing Options 195

Choosing Paper for Printing

Using the Same Type of Paper Regularly

Con???gure this setting so that current media type settings will be automatically selected when you load the same type of paper later.

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Keep Paper Type, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select On, and then press the OK button.

Note

???The speci???ed media type setting is updated in the following situations.

???When using sheets, if you send a print job before loading a sheet, the media type setting is updated to match the type of paper speci???ed by the print job.

???When you have selected ManageRemainRoll > On on the Control Panel and a barcode is printed on the roll, the media type setting is updated to match the type of paper speci???ed by the barcode.

???To change the media type setting, see ???Changing the Type of Paper???. (???P.195)

196 Enhanced Printing Options

Choosing Paper for Printing

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver

If you replace the paper, complete the printer driver settings for the paper type and size.

For instructions on con???guring paper settings in the printer driver, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (???P.197)

???Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (???P.199)

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)

If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.

Important

???Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.

If the type and size do not match, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

Note

???Click the B Get Information button to display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box. On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and con???gure printer driver settings for the feed source and type of paper.

Enhanced Printing Options 197

Choosing Paper for Printing

5. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

6. In the A Page Size list, select the size of the original as speci???ed in the application.

7. In the L Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.

8. If you have selected Roll Paper in L Paper Source, select the width of the loaded roll in M Roll Paper Width.

Note

???A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications. For details on available printing conditions, see ???Printer Driver Settings (Windows)???. (???P.336)

198 Enhanced Printing Options

Choosing Paper for Printing

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)

If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. Choose the original size in the F Paper Size list.

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

Enhanced Printing Options 199

Choosing Paper for Printing

7. Access the Page Setup pane.

8. In the A Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.

9. If you have selected Manual in A Paper Source, make sure the size as selected in Page Setup is displayed in C Page Size. If you have selected Roll Paper in A Paper Source, make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Width.

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

Note

???A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications. For details on available printing conditions, see ???Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.454)

200 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing enlargements or reductions

Printing enlargements or reductions

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size

You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.

Enlarged/Reduced Printing

Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.

Fit Paper Size

Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.

For instructions on resizing originals to match the paper size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) (???P.202)

???Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) (???P.204)

Note

???For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of 150 dpi or more at actual size.

Enhanced Printing Options 201

Printing enlargements or reductions

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following example.

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: A4 (210.0??297.0mm)/Letter (8.3 ?? 11.7 in)

???Paper: Roll

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5. Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.

6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

202 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing enlargements or reductions

7. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

8. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).

9. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the application. In this case, click ISO A4.

10. Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

11. Select the D Fit Paper Size check box.

12. Click ISO A3 in the G Paper Size list.

13. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Enhanced Printing Options 203

Printing enlargements or reductions

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following example.

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: A4 (210.0 ?? 297.0 mm [8.3 ?? 11.7 in])

???Paper: Roll paper

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

204 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing enlargements or reductions

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

9. Access the Page Setup pane.

10. Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.

Enhanced Printing Options 205

Printing enlargements or reductions

11. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as speci???ed in C

Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.

13. Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

14. Make sure E Fit Paper Size is selected.

15. Click ISO A3 in the I Paper Size list.

16. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

206 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing enlargements or reductions

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width

You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.

Enlarged/Reduced Printing

Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.

Fit Roll Paper Width

Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width, as desired.

For instructions on resizing originals to match the roll paper width, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) (???P.208)

???Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) (???P.210)

Note

???For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of 150 dpi or more at actual size.

Enhanced Printing Options 207

Printing enlargements or reductions

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.

???Document: Any type

???Page size: A4 (210.0??297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 ?? 11.7 in)

???Paper: Roll

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5. Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.

6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

8. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").

208 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing enlargements or reductions

9. Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

Note

???If the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the

B Borderless Printing check box.

10. Click E Fit Roll Paper Width.

Note

???After you click E Fit Roll Paper Width, the Information dialog box is displayed. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list and click OK.

???Make sure the roll paper width you specify matches the width of the loaded roll.

11.Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

???For tips on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Enhanced Printing Options 209

Printing enlargements or reductions

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: A4 (210.0 ?? 297.0 mm [8.3 ?? 11.7 in])

???Paper: Roll paper

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

210 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing enlargements or reductions

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

9. Access the Page Setup pane.

10. Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.

11. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list-in this case, 16 in. (406.4mm).

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

Enhanced Printing Options 211

Printing enlargements or reductions

12. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the

Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.

13. Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

14. Click F Fit Roll Paper Width.

15. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

212 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing enlargements or reductions

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value

You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.

Enlarged/Reduced Printing

Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.

Scaling

Enlarge or reduce originals by a particular amount, as desired.

For instructions on entering a scaling value to resize originals, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows) (???P.214)

???Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X) (???P.216)

Note

???For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of 150 dpi or more at actual size.

Enhanced Printing Options 213

Printing enlargements or reductions

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following example.

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: A4 (210.0 ?? 297.0 mm [8.3 ?? 11.7 in])

???Paper: Roll paper

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

Important

??? In borderless printing, you cannot resize originals by entering a scaling value.

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5. Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.

6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

214 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing enlargements or reductions

7. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

8. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).

9. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the application. In this

case, click ISO A4.

10. Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

11. Click ISO A4 in the G Paper Size list.

12. Click F Scaling and enter ???120???.

Note

???You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portions off the bottom and right edges of the paper will not be printed.

???If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting E Print Centered on the Layout sheet.

13. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Enhanced Printing Options 215

Printing enlargements or reductions

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following example.

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: A4 (210.0 ?? 297.0 mm [8.3 ?? 11.7 in])

???Paper: Roll paper

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

216 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing enlargements or reductions

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

9. Access the Page Setup pane.

10. Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.

Enhanced Printing Options 217

Printing enlargements or reductions

11. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the

Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.

13. Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

14. Click G Scaling and enter ???120???.

Note

???You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portion off the edge of the paper will not be printed.

???If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting the J Print Centered check box.

15.Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

???For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

218 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing at full size

Printing at full size

Printing on Oversized Paper

Except in borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to your selected paper size minus the space for a margin. (???P.75) To print documents or images you prepare without a margin at actual size, use an oversized paper size.

For example, to print a A4-sized original without a margin at A4 size, print it on paper larger than A4 size and cut away the excess margin.

Note

???If you prepare an original for printing without a margin and print it on paper of regular size, the image near the edge will not be printed.

Oversize

The margin required by the printer is added around the ???outside??? of a regular paper size. For example, when printing a A4-sized original (210??297 mm), you have the following options.

???(a) Regular paper size: Gray area not printed

???(b) Page Size

???(c) Oversized paper size: Print area matches the page size (b)

Important

???When printing on oversize paper, load paper larger than the page size-a size that includes the margin required by the printer.

???Sheets: Load paper that is at least 6 mm (0.24 in) wider and 26 mm (1 in) higher than the page size

???Rolls: Load paper that is at least 6 mm (0.24 in) wider and 6 mm (0.24 in) higher than the page size

Note

???Paper larger than the maximum size supported by the printer cannot be used as paper for oversized printing. (???P.100)

???Oversized printing (selecting Oversize in Page Size) is only available in Windows. For oversized printing on sheets, choose Manual as Paper Source.

???To perform oversized printing on a Macintosh computer, you must specify a non-standard page size and print on it.

???To specify a non-standard paper size in oversized printing, register the paper size as a Custom Paper Size. Oversized printing is not available with ???Custom Size???. (???P.261)

Enhanced Printing Options 219

Printing at full size

For instructions on oversized printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Printing at Full Size (Windows) (???P.220)

???Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X) (???P.222)

Printing at Full Size (Windows)

This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)

???Document: Any Type

???Page Size: A4 (210.0??297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 ?? 11.7 in)

???Paper: Roll

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

220 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing at full size

6. Click O Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.

7. In the Paper Size Options dialog box, select the Oversize check box in Display Series.

8. Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.

9. Click Oversize - ISO A4 in the A Page Size list.

10. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

11. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).

12. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Enhanced Printing Options 221

Printing at full size

Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: A4 (210.0 ?? 297.0 mm [8.3 ?? 11.7 in])

???Paper: Roll paper

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. In F Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - Oversize.

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

222 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing at full size

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

9. Access the Page Setup pane.

10. Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.

Enhanced Printing Options 223

Printing at full size

11. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure C Page Size shows the original size as speci???ed in C Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 - Oversize.

13. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

224 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing at full size

Borderless Printing at Actual Size

Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images) without a surrounding margin, or border.

Borderless Printing

In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.

Important

???Borderless printing is only available with rolls.

???Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

???Paper incompatible with the printer???s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only.

???These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.

???You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.

???When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. After ejecting and cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.

???By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.

???On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.

???Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.

Borderless Printing Method

Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.

Enhanced Printing Options 225

Printing at full size

Print Image with Actual Size

Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. Originals must be prepared in a size that exceeds the dimensions of the paper by 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side.

Note

???Not all page sizes are available.

???Even if you prepare originals of the same size as the paper size, the originals are automatically enlarged when you print borderlessly in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size. This may affect image quality. When image quality is most important, make the original 3 mm longer on each side than the paper size so that the image can be printed at actual size in borderless printing.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) (???P.227)

???Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) (???P.229)

226 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing at full size

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)

This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.

???Document: Any type

???Page size: 10??12 inches (254.0??304.8 mm)

???Paper: Roll

???Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper

???Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1.Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in) larger on each side than 254.0??304.8 mm (10 ?? 12 in) -that is, 260.0??310.8 mm (10.2 ?? 12.2 in)

Note

???If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.

???The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it ???ts inside the paper area to be printed on.

2.Choose Print in the application menu.

3.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

4.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

5. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight Coated Paper.

6. Select the print target in the E Print Target list.

Enhanced Printing Options 227

Printing at full size

7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

8. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the source application. In this case, click 10"x12".

9. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

10. Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.

11. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll (254.0mm).

12. Click OK to close the Information dialog box.

13. In C Borderless Printing Method, click F Print Image with Actual Size.

14. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

228 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing at full size

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: 10 ?? 12 inches (254.0??304.8 mm)-Borderless

???Paper: Roll paper

???Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper

???Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. In the F Paper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click

10"x12" - Borderless.

Note

???Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by ???-Borderless???.

4.If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

Enhanced Printing Options 229

Printing at full size

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight Coated Paper.

7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

9. Access the Page Setup pane.

10. Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.

230 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing at full size

11. Con???rm that the roll paper width matches the paper size.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list-in this case, 10 in. (254.0mm).

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the

Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" - Borderless.

13. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

Enhanced Printing Options 231

Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size

Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images) without a surrounding margin, or border.

Borderless Printing

In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.

Important

???Borderless printing is only available with rolls.

???Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

???Paper incompatible with the printer???s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only.

???These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.

???You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.

???When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. After ejecting and cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.

???By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.

???On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.

???Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.

Borderless Printing Method

Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.

232 Enhanced Printing Options

Borderless Printing

Fit Paper Size

Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.

Note

???The printer driver automatically enlarges originals 3 mm (0.12 in) past the dimensions of the paper on each side. The 3 mm portion beyond the edge on each side is not printed.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the paper size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) (???P.234)

???Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) (???P.236)

Enhanced Printing Options 233

Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the following example.

???Document: Any type

???Page size: 10??12 inches (254.0??304.8 mm)

???Paper: Roll

???Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper

???Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1.In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.

Note

???If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.

2.Choose Print in the application menu.

3.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

4.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

5. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight Coated Paper.

6. Select the print target in the E Print Target list.

234 Enhanced Printing Options

Borderless Printing

7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

8. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the application. In this case, click 10"x12".

9. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

10. Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.

11. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll (254.0mm).

12. Click OK to close the Information dialog box.

13. In C Borderless Printing Method, click D Fit Paper Size.

14. Click Match Page Size in the G Paper Size list.

15. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Enhanced Printing Options 235

Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the following example.

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: 10??12 inches (254.0??304.8 mm)

???Paper: Roll paper

???Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper

???Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".

Note

???All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to match the paper size.

4.If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

236 Enhanced Printing Options

Borderless Printing

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight Coated Paper.

7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

9. Access the Page Setup pane.

10. Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.

Enhanced Printing Options 237

Borderless Printing

11. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list-in this case, 10

in. (254.0mm).

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the

Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".

13. On the Page Setup pane, select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

14. Select the H Borderless Printing check box.

15. Click E Fit Paper Size under D Enlarged/Reduced Printing.

16. In I Paper Size, click the paper size. In this case, click 10"x12" - Borderless.

17. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

238 Enhanced Printing Options

Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width

Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images) without a surrounding margin, or border.

Borderless Printing

In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.

Important

???Borderless printing is only available with rolls.

???Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

???Paper incompatible with the printer???s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only.

???These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.

???You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.

???When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. After ejecting and cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.

???By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.

???On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.

???Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.

Borderless Printing Method

Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.

Enhanced Printing Options 239

Borderless Printing

Scale to ???t Roll Paper Width

Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width.

Note

???You can combine this function with rotating pages 90 degrees before printing so that the original width (relative to portrait orientation) matches the roll paper width in borderless printing.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the roll paper width, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) (???P.241)

???Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) (???P.243)

240 Enhanced Printing Options

Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.

???Document: Any type

???Page size: A4 (210.0??297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 ?? 11.7 in)

???Paper: Roll

???Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper

???Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1.In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.

Note

???If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.

2.Choose Print in the application menu.

3.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

4.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

5. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight Coated Paper.

6. Select the print target in the E Print Target list.

Enhanced Printing Options 241

Borderless Printing

7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

8. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").

9. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

10. Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.

11. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll (254.0mm).

12. Click OK to close the Information dialog box.

13. In C Borderless Printing Method, make sure E Scale to ???t Roll Paper Width is selected.

14. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

242 Enhanced Printing Options

Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: A4 (210.0 ?? 297.0 mm [8.3 ?? 11.7 in])

???Paper: Roll paper

???Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper

???Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.

Note

???All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to ???t the roll width.

4.If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

Enhanced Printing Options 243

Borderless Printing

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight Coated Paper.

7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

9. Access the Page Setup pane.

10. Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.

244 Enhanced Printing Options

Borderless Printing

11. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list-in this case, 10

in. (254.0mm).

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the

Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.

13. Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

14. Select the H Borderless Printing check box.

This ensures that F Fit Roll Paper Width is automatically selected in D Enlarged/Reduced Printing.

15. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

Enhanced Printing Options 245

Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing at Actual Size

Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or images) without a surrounding margin, or border.

Borderless Printing

In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.

Important

???Borderless printing is only available with rolls.

???Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

???Paper incompatible with the printer???s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only.

???These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.

???You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.

???When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver. In this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. After ejecting and cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.

???By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.

???On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.

???Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.

Borderless Printing Method

Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.

246 Enhanced Printing Options

Borderless Printing

Print Image with Actual Size

Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. Originals must be prepared in a size that exceeds the dimensions of the paper by 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side.

Note

???Not all page sizes are available.

???Even if you prepare originals of the same size as the paper size, the originals are automatically enlarged when you print borderlessly in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size. This may affect image quality. When image quality is most important, make the original 3 mm longer on each side than the paper size so that the image can be printed at actual size in borderless printing.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) (???P.248)

???Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) (???P.250)

Enhanced Printing Options 247

Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)

This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.

???Document: Any type

???Page size: 10??12 inches (254.0??304.8 mm)

???Paper: Roll

???Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper

???Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1.Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in) larger on each side than 254.0??304.8 mm (10 ?? 12 in) -that is, 260.0??310.8 mm (10.2 ?? 12.2 in)

Note

???If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.

???The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it ???ts inside the paper area to be printed on.

2.Choose Print in the application menu.

3.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

4.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

5. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight Coated Paper.

6. Select the print target in the E Print Target list.

248 Enhanced Printing Options

Borderless Printing

7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

8. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the source application. In this case, click 10"x12".

9. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

10. Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.

11. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll (254.0mm).

12. Click OK to close the Information dialog box.

13. In C Borderless Printing Method, click F Print Image with Actual Size.

14. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Enhanced Printing Options 249

Borderless Printing

Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: 10 ?? 12 inches (254.0??304.8 mm)-Borderless

???Paper: Roll paper

???Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper

???Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. In the F Paper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click

10"x12" - Borderless.

Note

???Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by ???-Borderless???.

4.If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

250 Enhanced Printing Options

Borderless Printing

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight Coated Paper.

7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

9. Access the Page Setup pane.

10. Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.

Enhanced Printing Options 251

Borderless Printing

11. Con???rm that the roll paper width matches the paper size.

Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list-in this case, 10 in. (254.0mm).

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the

Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" - Borderless.

13. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

252 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing)

You can create vertical or horizontal banners by printing originals that are in banner format on rolls.

Originals created in Microsoft Word or other applications in your preferred size can be enlarged to ???ll the width of roll paper by completing simple printer driver settings.

Fit Roll Paper Width

You can easily create vertical or horizontal banners by automatically enlarging or reducing originals to ???t the full width of rolls.

Note

??? The maximum supported roll length is 18.0 m or 19.7 yd.

For instructions on printing vertical or horizontal banners, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) (???P.254)

???Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X) (???P.258)

Important

???Before printing, check how much of the roll paper is left. If you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, a warning message is displayed when there is not enough roll paper left.

???If not much ink is left, prepare replacement ink tanks.

???To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality, and choose Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.

Enhanced Printing Options 253

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows)

This topic describes how to print a banner about ???ve times as long as the roll width based on the following example.

???Document: A horizontal banner created in Microsoft Word

???Page size: Non-standard (100??500 mm [3.9??19.7 in])

???Paper: Roll

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: 16 in (406.4 mm)

Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.

1.Register a Custom Paper Size.

Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a Custom Paper Size. In this example, 100??500 mm (3.9??19.7 in) is registered.

2.In the application, create an original in the size you registered.

3.Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.

Registering a Custom Paper Size

This example describes how to register a paper size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in either horizontal or vertical format.

1. Display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.348)

2. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

3. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

4. Click O Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.

5. Enter a desired paper name in Custom Paper Size Name. ???My Horizontal Banner??? is used in this example.

6. In Units, click mm.

7. Under Paper Size, enter ???100??? in Width and ???500??? in Height.

8. Click Add to add the paper size of ???My Horizontal Banner.???

9. Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.

254 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

10. Close the printer driver dialog box.

Note

???You can also specify a Custom Size as the paper size. Note that Custom Size settings are not available after you exit the application.

For more information,see ???Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)???. (???P.262)

Creating the banner in the application

Follow the steps below to create the banner in Microsoft Word using the Custom Paper Size you registered.

1. Start Microsoft Word.

2. Choose Page Setup from the File menu to display the Page Setup dialog box.

3. Under Paper Size, click the Custom Paper Size you registered-"My Horizontal Banner" in this example.

Important

???If "My Horizontal Banner" is not listed, make sure this printer is selected as the printer to use.

???In applications such as Microsoft PowerPoint that do not enable you to choose registered paper sizes, use the custom paper size setting in ???Custom??? and specify 100??500 mm (3.9??19.7 in)

4.Set the printing orientation to horizontal.

5.Create the banner.

Printing the banner

Follow these steps to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.

1. Choose Print in the Microsoft Word menu.

2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5. After con???rming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Poster in the E Print Target list.

Enhanced Printing Options 255

9. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.
10. After you click E Fit Roll Paper Width, the Information dialog box is displayed.
11. Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 16-in. Roll (406.4mm), and then click OK.

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7. In the A Page Size list, click the size you registered, ???My Horizontal Banner???.

8. Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

Note

???If the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the

B Borderless Printing check box.

256 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

12. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

If printing is unsuccessful, you may be able to print after completing the following setting.

1. On the Layout sheet, click J Special Settings to display the Special Settings dialog box.

2. In the FineZoom Settings list, click Yes.

Enhanced Printing Options 257

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print a banner about ???ve times as long as the roll width based on the following example.

???Document: An original designed for a horizontal banner

???Page Size: Non-standard (100??500 mm [3.9??19.7 in])

???Paper: Roll

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)

Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.

1.In the application, create an original in the format of a horizontal or vertical banner.

2.Register a Custom Page Sizes

Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a Custom Page Sizes in Page Setup. In this example, 100??500 mm (3.9??19.7 in) is registered.

3.Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.

Note

???The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of setting up non-standard paper sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.

Register a Custom Page Sizes

This example describes how to register and print using a page size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in either horizontal or vertical format.

1. Create the document in the application.

2. Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box.

3. Select the printer in the B Format for list.

4. Click Manage Custom Sizes in the C Paper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.

258 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

5. Double-click Untitled in the list at left, and then enter a name for the page size you want to register. Here, enter ???100*500.???

If the Untitled size is not listed at left, click + below the list.

6. Under Page Size, enter ???10??? in Width and ???50??? in Height. Here, measurements are entered in centimeters.

7. Specify the margins by entering ???0.3??? in Printer Margins. Here, too, measurements are entered in centimeters.

8. Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.

9. In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click "100*500", the size you registered.

10. In D Orientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.

11. Click F OK to close the dialog box.

Print the banner

Follow the steps below to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.

2. Access the Main pane.

3. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

4. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

5. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

6. Access the Page Setup pane.

Enhanced Printing Options 259

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

7. Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.

8. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list-in this case, 16 in. (406.4mm).

Note

???If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane and update the printer information.

9. In C Page Size, make sure "100*500" is displayed, as registered in Page Setup.

10. Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

11. Click F Fit Roll Paper Width.

12. Con???rm the print settings, and click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

260 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes

By specifying the paper size, you can print on non-standard sizes of paper.

There are two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes, as follows.

Registering non-standard paper size in the printer driver

After you register non-standard paper sizes, they are listed with standard sizes so that you can choose them anytime as needed.

Note

???These non-standard paper sizes you register in the printer driver are called Custom Paper Size in Windows and ???Custom Sizes??? in Mac OS X.

Specifying custom paper sizes for temporary use

Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you exit the application. If you want to set up a non-standard paper size so that it will always be available, we recommend registering the paper size in the printer driver.

Note

???These temporary paper sizes you register on the printer are called ???Custom Sizes??? in Windows.

???This can only be con???gured in Windows.

For instructions on specifying non-standard paper sizes for printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) (???P.262)

???Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X) (???P.266)

Enhanced Printing Options 261

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)

This topic describes two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes.

???Printing by using Custom Size

???Printing by using Custom Paper Size

Printing by using Custom Size

This section describes how to print using Custom Size based on the following example.

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: Square of non-standard dimensions (430??430 mm [16.9??16.9 in])

???Paper: Sheets

???Paper type: Any type

???Paper Size: A square sheet (430 ?? 430 mm [16.9 ?? 16.9 in])

1.Load the square paper (430 ?? 430 mm [16.9 ?? 16.9 in]) in the printer.

2.Choose Print in the application menu.

3.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

4.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

5. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

6. After con???rming that D Easy Settings is selected, select from the E Print Target list.

262 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

8. Click Manual in the L Paper Source list.

9. Click Custom Size in the A Page Size list to display the Custom Size Settings dialog box.

10. Con???rm that mm is selected in Units.

11. Enter ???430??? (16.9 in) in both Width and Height.

12. Click OK to close the Custom Size Settings dialog box.

13. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Enhanced Printing Options 263

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

Printing by using Custom Paper Size

This section describes how to print using Custom Paper Size based on the following example. First, register a non-standard paper size called ???430 mm Square??? as a Custom Paper Size.

???Document: Any Type

???Page Size: A square sheet (430 ?? 430 mm [16.9 ?? 16.9 in])

???Paper: Sheets

???Media Type: Any type

???Paper Size: A square sheet (430 ?? 430 mm [16.9 ?? 16.9 in])

1.Load the square paper (430 ?? 430 mm [16.9 ?? 16.9 in]) in the printer.

2.Choose Print in the application menu.

3.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

4.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

5. In the A Media Type list, select the A Media Type that is loaded in the printer.

6. After con???rming that D Easy Settings is selected, select the E Print Target from the E Print

Target list.

264 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

8. Click O Size Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box.

9. Enter a desired paper name in Custom Paper Size Name. ???430 mm Square??? is used in this example.

10. Select mm in Units.

11. Enter ???430??? (16.9 in) in both Width and Height.

Note

???If you select the Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height check box, after you enter a value in either Width or Height, the other value will be automatically applied based on the original aspect ratio.

12.Click Add to register ???430 mm Square???.

13.Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box.

14.Click Manual in the L Paper Source list.

15.In the A Page Size list, click the size you added, "430 mm Square".

16.Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

???For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Enhanced Printing Options 265

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X)

This section describes how to register and print Custom Page Sizes based on the following example. Here, you will register a non-standard paper size named ???430*430??? in Custom Page Sizes.

???Document: Any Type

???Page Size: A square sheet (430 ?? 430 mm [16.9 ?? 16.9 in])

???Paper: Sheets

???Media Type: Any type

???Paper Size: A square sheet (430 ?? 430 mm [16.9 ?? 16.9 in])

Note

???The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of setting up non-standard paper sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.

1.Create the document in the application.

2.Load the square paper (430 ?? 430 mm [16.9 ?? 16.9 in]) in the printer.

3.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

4. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

266 Enhanced Printing Options

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

5. Click Manage Custom Sizes in the C Paper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes

dialog box.

6. In Page Size, enter the height and width of the original. Here, enter ???43.00 cm??? in Height and

Width.

7. In Printer Margins, enter ???0.5??? for the top and side margins and ???2.3??? for the bottom margin. Here, measurements are entered in centimeters.

8. Double-click Untitled in the list at left in the Custom Page Sizes dialog box and enter the paper name-in this case, ???430*430???.

9. Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.

10. In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ???430*430???, the size you registered.

11. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

12. Access the Main pane.

13. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

14. After con???rming that D Easy Settings is selected, select from the E Print Target list.

15. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

Enhanced Printing Options 267

Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes

16. Access the Page Setup pane.

17. Click Manual in the A Paper Source list.

18. In C Page Size, make sure ???430*430??? is displayed, as registered in Page Setup.

19. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

268 Enhanced Printing Options

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other

By arranging originals from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or web browser screen shots next to each other on single sheets, you can create highly expressive presentation materials, easy-to-understand meeting materials, and a variety of other printed documents.

Free Layout (Windows)

Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple ???les-even multiple source applications-in a single-page layout.

Important

??? Free Layout cannot be used in 64-bit version of Windows.

Enhanced Printing Options 269

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh)

Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple ???les-even multiple source applications-in a single-page layout.

For instructions on arranging originals from multiple applications, refer to the following topics.

???Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) (???P.271)

???Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X) (???P.273)

270 Enhanced Printing Options

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows)

This topic describes how to arrange multiple originals using the Free Layout function.

Important

??? Free Layout cannot be used in 64-bit version of Windows.

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

5. Select the A Page Layout check box.

6. Click Free Layout in the A Page Layout list.

Enhanced Printing Options 271

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

7. When you attempt to print, the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed. (At this point, the document will not be printed yet.)

8. Edit and rearrange the image in the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.

Important

???Without closing the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1-7 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page.

Note

???For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the imagePROGRAF Free Layout help topic.

9.Print from the imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.

Note

??? For details on imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Layout.

272 Enhanced Printing Options

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to use the Free Layout function to arrange multiple originals next to each other before printing.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.

2. Access the Page Setup pane.

3. Select the N Free Layout check box.

4. Click M Print.

5. The Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed.

6. Edit and rearrange the image in the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.

Note

???Without closing the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1 to 4 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page.

???For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout help topic.

Enhanced Printing Options 273

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

7. Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.

Note

??? For details on Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Layout.

274 Enhanced Printing Options

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously

You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.

Roll paper (banner)

Important

???This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.

???During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.

For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows) (???P.276)

???Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X) (???P.278)

Enhanced Printing Options 275

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows)

This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.

Important

???This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.

???During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.

5. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

6. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

276 Enhanced Printing Options

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

7. Click N Roll Paper Options to display the Roll Paper Options dialog box.

8. Select the B Banner Printing check box.

9. Click OK.

10. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Enhanced Printing Options 277

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.

Important

???This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.

???During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. Click the original size in the C Paper Size list.

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

278 Enhanced Printing Options

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.

7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

9. Access the Page Setup pane.

10. Click Roll Paper (Banner) in the A Paper Source list.

11. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

Enhanced Printing Options 279

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet

To conserve paper, you can print several pages of the original on a single sheet by reducing the original and dividing the sheet into areas for each page.

Page Layout

Specify a number of pages of the original to print on a single sheet, in a layout of multiple pages per sheet.

Note

???You can print up to 16 pages of the original on a single sheet.

???You can also change the page layout order and print page boundary lines, as desired.

Important

???This function cannot be combined with the following options.

???Borderless Printing

???Scaling Originals (Windows)

???Banner Printing (Windows)

For instructions on printing multiple pages per sheet, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) (???P.281)

???Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) (???P.283)

280 Enhanced Printing Options

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)

This topic describes how to print four pages of originals together on a single sheet based on the following example.

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: A3 (297.0??420.0 mm [11.7??16.5 in])

???Paper: Roll

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

6. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

Enhanced Printing Options 281

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

8. In A Page Size, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the application software. In this case, click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").

9. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

10. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).

11. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

12. Select the A Page Layout check box.

13. Click 4 Pages/Sheet in the A Page Layout list.

Note

???You can select the layout order for placing four pages on a sheet and a frame border in the Page Layout Printing dialog box by clicking B Set.

14.Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

???For tips on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

282 Enhanced Printing Options

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print four pages of an original on a single sheet, based on the following example.

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: A3 (297.0 ?? 420.0 mm [11.7 ?? 16.5 in])

???Paper: Roll paper

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

5. Access the Layout pane.

Enhanced Printing Options 283

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

6. Click 4 in the A Pages per Sheet list.

Note

???You can choose the layout order and specify a boundary line for the four pages in B Layout Direction and C Border.

7.Access the Main pane.

8. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

9. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

10. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

11. Access the Page Setup pane.

12. Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.

284 Enhanced Printing Options

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

13. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list-in this case, ISO

A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

14. Make sure C Page Size shows the original size as speci???ed in C Paper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A3.

15. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

Enhanced Printing Options 285

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Printing Posters in Sections

You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer.

Page Layout

Choose poster printing.

For instructions on printing large posters, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

??? Printing Large Posters (Windows) (???P.287)

Note

??? This method of poster printing is supported in Windows.

286 Enhanced Printing Options

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

Printing Large Posters (Windows)

You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer. This topic describes how to enlarge an A2 original for printing it in sections on four sheets, based on the following example.

???Document: Poster

???Page size: A2 (420.0??594.0 mm [16.5 ?? 23.4 in])

???Paper: Sheets

???Paper Size: A2 (420.0 ?? 594.0 mm [16.5 ?? 23.4 in])

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

5. Click Poster in the E Print Target list.

6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

Enhanced Printing Options 287

Tiling and multiple pages per sheet

7. In A Page Size, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the application. In this case, click

ISO A2.

8. Click Manual in the L Paper Source list.

9. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

10. Select the A Page Layout check box.

11. Click Poster (2 x 2) in the A Page Layout list.

Note

???Follow the steps below to print only a portion of the poster as divided for printing.

???Click B Set under A Page Layout to display the Pages to Print dialog box.

???On the Pages to Print dialog box, clear the check boxes of the portion you do not want to print.

???Click OK to close the Pages to Print dialog box.

12.Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

???For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

288 Enhanced Printing Options

Centering originals

Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls

You can print originals centered on a page-for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you are reducing the original.

Centering originals relative to roll paper width

If you use originals smaller than the roll paper width, you can center them relative to the width when printing.

Print Centered

Aligns the center of the original with the center of the roll, relative to the width.

For instructions on centering originals when printing on rolls, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) (???P.290)

???Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) (???P.292)

Enhanced Printing Options 289

Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows)

This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.

???Document: Any type

???Page size: A4 (210.0??297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 ?? 11.7 in)

???Paper: Roll

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5. Select the print target in the E Print Target list.

6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

290 Enhanced Printing Options

Centering originals

7. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").

8. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

9. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll (297.0mm).

10. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

11. Select the E Print Centered check box.

12. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Enhanced Printing Options 291

Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: A4 (210.0 ?? 297.0 mm [8.3 ?? 11.7 in])

???Paper: Roll paper

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

292 Enhanced Printing Options

Centering originals

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

9. Access the Page Setup pane.

10. Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.

Enhanced Printing Options 293

Centering originals

11. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Width -in this case, ISO A3/A4

(297.0mm).

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

12. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the

Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.

13. Select the J Print Centered check box.

14. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

294 Enhanced Printing Options

Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets

You can print originals centered on a page-for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you are reducing the original.

Centering originals on sheets

If you use paper larger than the original size or print originals after reduction, the printed images may be aligned in the upper-left corner of the paper. In this case, you can center originals on sheets when printing.

Print Centered

Aligns the center of the original with the center of the sheet.

For instructions on centering originals when printing on sheets, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows) (???P.296)

???Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X) (???P.298)

Enhanced Printing Options 295

Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows)

This topic describes how to reduce an original 50% for printing centered on a sheet.

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: A4 (210.0 ?? 297.0 mm [8.3 ?? 11.7 in])

???Paper: Sheets

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Paper size: A4 (210.0 ?? 297.0 mm [8.3 ?? 11.7 in])

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the application. In this case, click ISO A4.

296 Enhanced Printing Options

Centering originals

8. Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.

9. Click Match Page Size in the G Paper Size list.

10. Click F Scaling and enter ???50???.

11. Click Manual in the L Paper Source list.

12. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

13. Select the E Print Centered check box.

14. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Important

???If you have selected Manual as the paper source, follow the instructions on the printer control panel to enter the paper size.

Enhanced Printing Options 297

Centering originals

Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to center originals for printing on sheets, based on the following example.

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: A4

???Paper: Sheets

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Paper size: Non-standard

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - for Paper Tray (Large Margins).

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

298 Enhanced Printing Options

Centering originals

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

7. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

8. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

9. Access the Page Setup pane.

10. Click Manual in the A Paper Source list.

11. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the

Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 - for Paper Tray (Large Margins).

Enhanced Printing Options 299

Centering originals

12. Select the J Print Centered check box.

13. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

Important

???If you have selected Manual as the paper source, follow the instructions on the printer control panel to enter the paper size.

300 Enhanced Printing Options

Conserving roll paper

Conserving roll paper

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees

You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.

Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)

When originals are printed in portrait orientation, the original is rotated 90 degrees before printing if it ???ts within the roll width. This enables you to conserve paper.

Important

???If the page would exceed the roll paper width after rotation, use this function with Scale to ???t Roll Paper Width to print rotated pages.

For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows) (???P.302)

???Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X) (???P.304)

Enhanced Printing Options 301

Conserving roll paper

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows)

This topic describes how to conserve paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the following example.

???Document: Any type

???Page size: A4 (210.0??297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3??11.7 in)

???Paper: Roll

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0??297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3??11.7 in) original in portrait orientation 90 degrees to ???t within the width of A3/A4 roll paper (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve paper.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.

2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

302 Enhanced Printing Options

Conserving roll paper

6. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").

7. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

8. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll

(297.0mm).

9. Select the K Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) check box.

10. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Enhanced Printing Options 303

Conserving roll paper

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to conserve roll paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the following example.

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: A4 (210.0 ?? 297.0 mm [8.3 ?? 11.7 in])

???Paper: Roll paper

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0??297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 ?? 11.7 in) original in portrait orientation 90 degrees to ???t within the width of A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve paper.

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

304 Enhanced Printing Options

Conserving roll paper

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

7. Access the Page Setup pane.

8. Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.

9. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Width -in this case, ISO A3/A4 (297.0mm).

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

Enhanced Printing Options 305

Conserving roll paper

10. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the

Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.

11. Select the L Rotate Page 90 degrees check box.

12. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

306 Enhanced Printing Options

Conserving roll paper

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins

You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.

No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper)

You can print without feeding the paper for blank portions of originals if there are top and bottom margins in originals. This enables you to conserve as much paper as the size of the margins.

Important

???Printing without the top and bottom margins is not supported in the following cases.

???Banner printing

???If you have chosen poster as the type of page layout

Note

???Even during borderless printing, you can print without the top and bottom margins.

???Printing without the top and bottom margins may cause inconsistency in the size of printed documents, depending on the layout of images or text in your originals.

For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) (???P.308)

???Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X) (???P.310)

Enhanced Printing Options 307

Conserving roll paper

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows)

This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin, based on the following example.

???Document: Any type

???Page size: A4 (210.0??297.0mm)/Letter (8.3 ?? 11.7 in)

???Paper: Roll

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

308 Enhanced Printing Options

Conserving roll paper

6. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").

7. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

8. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll

(297.0mm).

9. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

10. Select the G No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper) check box.

11. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Enhanced Printing Options 309

Conserving roll paper

Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin, based on the following example.

???Document: Any Type

???Page size: A4 (210.0 ?? 297.0 mm [8.3 ?? 11.7 in])

???Paper: Roll paper

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

310 Enhanced Printing Options

Conserving roll paper

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

7. Access the Page Setup pane.

8. Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.

9. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Width -in this case, ISO A3/A4 (297.0mm).

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

Enhanced Printing Options 311

Conserving roll paper

10. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the

Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.

11. Select the K No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box.

12. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

312 Enhanced Printing Options

Checking Images Before Printing

Checking Images Before Printing

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing

You can check the print layout on the preview screen.

Open Preview When Print Job Starts (Windows)

While viewing the preview screen, you can also adjust orientation or other settings, and your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen.

Note

??? Under some settings and in some environments, PageComposer may be started.

Enhanced Printing Options 313

Checking Images Before Printing

Preview (Macintosh)

While viewing the preview screen, you can also adjust layout or size settings, and your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen.

For instructions on how to check the layout before printing, refer to the following topics:

???Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Windows) (???P.315)

???Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac OS X) (???P.317)

314 Enhanced Printing Options

Checking Images Before Printing

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing

(Windows)

This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.

2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. Select the L Open Preview When Print Job Starts check box.

5. After you click OK, when you print a job, the imagePROGRAF Preview window will be displayed.

Note

???If PageComposer is running, access the Special Settings dialog box from the Layout sheet and clear Enable Preview Switching.

Enhanced Printing Options 315

Checking Images Before Printing

6. On the main window, you can check the layout and change settings as needed.

7. To print, click Start Printing in the File menu.

Note

??? For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, see Preview.

316 Enhanced Printing Options

Checking Images Before Printing

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to check the layout before printing using the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview function.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.

2. Access the Main pane.

3. Select the O Print Preview check box.

4. Click M Print.

5. The Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window is displayed.

6. Check the layout and adjust settings in the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window as desired.

7. Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview menu.

Note

??? For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, refer to Preview.

Enhanced Printing Options 317

Other useful settings

Other useful settings

Printing With Watermarks

You can add watermarks (background images) to documents that require special handling.

Watermark

Watermarks are applied to all pages of your document.

Important

??? Watermarks are not printed if you select poster as the type of page layout.

The following watermarks are provided:

???CONFIDENTIAL

???COPY

???DRAFT

???FILE COPY

???FINAL

???PRELIMINARY

???PROOF

???TOP SECRET

You can also create your own watermarks. Specify the following options to customize your watermark.

???Watermark string: Specify the font, size, color, and so on. Surround the watermark with a frame, if desired.

???Watermark position: Specify the position on the page, the angle, and so on.

???Watermark printing method: Specify whether to print the watermark superimposed or under the document image. You can also print the watermark only on the ???rst page, if desired.

Note

???Watermarks are supported in Windows.

???In addition to the provided watermarks, you can create up to 50 original watermarks in Windows.

For detailed instructions on printing with watermarks, refer to the following topics:

??? Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) (???P.319)

318 Enhanced Printing Options

Other useful settings

Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows)

This topic describes how to print with watermarks, based on the following example of printing with a ???FILE COPY??? watermark.

???Document: CAD drawing

???Page size: A2 (420.0??594.0 mm [16.5 ?? 23.4 in])

???Paper: Roll paper

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in[)

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5. After con???rming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Color Line Drawing) in the

E Print Target list.

Note

??? You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking G View Settings.

Enhanced Printing Options 319

8.
9.

Other useful settings

6. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

7. In A Page Size, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the application software. In this case, click ISO A2.

Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).

10. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

11. Select the C Watermark check box.

12. Click FILE COPY in the Watermarks list.

Note

???Click D Edit Watermark to open the Edit Watermark dialog box. In the Edit Watermark dialog box, you can create custom watermarks and change the position and angle of watermarks.

13.Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

???For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

320 Enhanced Printing Options

Other useful settings

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper

Orientation

You can specify the original orientation to match the orientation of the paper for printing.

Orientation

Paper is usually loaded in the printer in portrait orientation. When you have an original in landscape orientation, you can specify the printing orientation so that the original is printed in landscape orientation.

Rotate 180 degrees

The original is rotated 180 degrees to print it upside down.

Mirror

A mirror image of the original is printed.

For instructions on specifying the original orientation before printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows) (???P.322)

???Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X) (???P.324)

Enhanced Printing Options 321

Other useful settings

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper

Orientation (Windows)

This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based on the following example.

???Document: An original in landscape orientation

???Page size: A4 (210.0 ?? 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 ?? 11.7 in)

???Paper: Roll

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

5. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

6. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

7. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

322 Enhanced Printing Options

Other useful settings

8. In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as speci???ed in the application. In this case, click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").

9. In H Orientation, click J Landscape.

10. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

11. Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm).

12. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Enhanced Printing Options 323

Other useful settings

Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based on the following example.

???Document: An original in landscape orientation

???Page size: A4 (210.0 ?? 297.0 mm [8.3 ?? 11.7 in])

???Paper: Roll paper

???Paper type: Plain Paper

???Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. In the F Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.

4. In D Orientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.

5. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

324 Enhanced Printing Options

Other useful settings

6. Access the Main pane.

7. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.

8. Make your selection in the E Print Target list.

9. Make your selection in the F Print Quality list.

10. Access the Page Setup pane.

11. Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.

Enhanced Printing Options 325

Other useful settings

12. Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Width list-in this case, ISO

A2/A3 (420.0mm).

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

13. Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the

Page Attributes dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.

14. Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

326 Enhanced Printing Options

Other useful settings

Using Favorites

You can register print settings as ???favorites??? to reuse settings from a particular job that met your expectations, or settings for a particular page size that you will use repeatedly.

Favorites

Registering a favorite for later use. You can choose the settings you have registered from a list before printing, and you can check the settings details.

Note

???You can also save the favorite settings as ???les. Using these ???les is a convenient way to print under the same conditions on another computer. (In Windows.)

For instructions on using favorites to print, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Using Favorites (Windows) (???P.328)

???Using Favorites (Mac OS X) (???P.330)

Enhanced Printing Options 327

Other useful settings

Using Favorites (Windows)

This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.

Registering a favorite

Follow the steps below to save the current print settings as a favorite.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.

2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3. Complete the print settings.

4. Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.

5. Click H Add to display the Add dialog box.

6. Enter a desired name in Name, such as ???Photos for Presentations??? or ???Monthly Report.???

7. Choose a ???tting icon for these print settings in the Icon list.

8. In Comment, enter a description of the favorite to be added, as desired.

9. Click OK to close the Add dialog box.

The favorite you have added is now displayed in A Favorites.

Note

??? To save a favorite as a ???le, click J Export and specify the ???le to save.

328 Enhanced Printing Options

Other useful settings

Printing using the favorite

Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.

2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3. Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.

4. In the A Favorites, choose the favorite you registered.

Note

???To import a favorite, click I Import and specify the favorite ???le.

5.Click D Apply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings.

6.Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

???For instructions on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Enhanced Printing Options 329

Other useful settings

Using Favorites (Mac OS X)

You can use the Presets function in Mac OS X for favorite-based printing.

Note

???In the printing dialog box, click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings. This is a standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.

330 Enhanced Printing Options

Other useful settings

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing

Roll paper can be automatically cut after printing.

Note

???It may not be possible to cut certain types of paper, such as adhesive paper. For details on types of paper that cannot be used with the auto cut feature, see the Paper Reference Guide (???P.95)

Automatic Cutting

Roll paper is cut automatically after printing. If you prefer, you can print continuously without cutting the roll, or you can print a cut line.

For instructions on cutting roll paper after printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.

???Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) (???P.332)

???Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X) (???P.333)

Enhanced Printing Options 331

Other useful settings

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows)

This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically after printing (using the auto cut function), as well as how to print a cut line for manual cutting.

Note

???The auto cut function is activated on the printer by default and when the printer driver is installed. Follow the steps below to reactivate the function if it is disabled, or to select the setting for printing a cut line instead.

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

4. Click Roll Paper in the L Paper Source list.

5. Click N Roll Paper Options to display the Roll Paper Options dialog box.

6. To enable automatic cutting, click Yes in the A Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline.

7. Click OK to close the Roll Paper Options dialog box.

8. Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

??? For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Roll paper will be automatically cut after printing.

332 Enhanced Printing Options

Other useful settings

Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically after printing (using the auto cut function), as well as how to print a cut line for manual cutting.

Note

???The auto cut function is activated on the printer by default and when the printer driver is installed. Follow the steps below to reactivate the function if it is disabled, or to select the setting for printing a cut line instead.

1.This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

Enhanced Printing Options 333

Other useful settings

5. Access the Page Setup pane.

6. Click Roll Paper in the A Paper Source list.

7. Access the Main pane.

8. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

9. Click C Set to display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box.

334 Enhanced Printing Options

Other useful settings

10. To enable automatic cutting, click Printer Default in the H Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline.

Important

???If the automatic cut function has been deactivated on the printer, change the auto cut setting on the printer Control Panel.

11.Click OK to close the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box.

12.Con???rm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.

Note

???For tips on con???rming print settings, see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.457)

Enhanced Printing Options 335

Printer Driver

Windows Software

Printer Driver

Printer Driver Settings (Windows)

For instructions on accessing the Windows printer driver, refer to the following topics.

???Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) (???P.346)

???Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows) (???P.348) For information on the Windows printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.

???Main Sheet (Windows) (???P.350)

You can specify the type of paper, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings. Choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

???Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (???P.354)

???View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Windows) (???P.355)

???Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (Windows) (???P.356)

???Matching Sheet (Windows) (???P.359)

???Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome (Windows) (???P.361)

???Page Setup Sheet (Windows) (???P.364)

You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the orientation, the paper size and feed source, and automatic cutting.

???Paper Size Options Dialog Box (Windows) (???P.367)

???Layout Sheet (Windows) (???P.368)

You can specify the page layout, watermarks, the orientation, the number of copies, and print processing options.

???Page Options Dialog Box (Windows) (???P.370)

???Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (???P.371)

336 Windows Software

Printer Driver

???Favorites Sheet (Windows) (???P.372)

Groups of print settings you select on each sheet can be saved as a favorite. Favorites you have added can be edited or used at the time of printing as desired.

???Utility Sheet (Windows) (???P.374)

You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

???Support Sheet (Windows) (???P.375)

You can view support information and the user manual.

???Device Settings Sheet (Windows) (???P.377)

You can display settings for optional equipment installed on the printer and see the version information for the printer driver.

imagePROGRAF Free Layout is a feature for freely arranging originals from various source applications on a single page as desired before printing. For details, see Free Layout.

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy is a feature for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER. For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

Important

???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and imagePROGRAF Free Layout cannot be used on 64-bit version of Windows.

Windows Software 337

Printer Driver

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)

If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.

Important

???Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.

If the type and size do not match, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.

1.Choose Print in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

Note

???Click the B Get Information button to display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box. On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and con???gure printer driver settings for the feed source and type of paper.

5.Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.

338 Windows Software

Printer Driver

6. In the A Page Size list, select the size of the original as speci???ed in the application.

7. In the L Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.

8. If you have selected Roll Paper in L Paper Source, select the width of the loaded roll in M Roll

Paper Width.

Note

???A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications. For details on available printing conditions, see ???Printer Driver Settings (Windows)???. (???P.336)

Windows Software 339

Printer Driver

Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)

There are two ways to con???rm the print settings, as follows.

???Checking a preview of the settings

???Checking a print preview

Checking a preview of the settings

A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, and Layout sheets. By checking illustrations and numerical values in the preview, you can con???rm current settings for the page size, orientation, paper source, layout, and so on.

340 Windows Software

Printer Driver

Note

???To con???rm the Print Target speci???ed in Easy Settings, click G View Settings on the Main sheet to display the View Settings dialog box.

Checking a print preview

You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.

When you activate this feature, imagePROGRAF Preview or PageComposer is started before printing. Con???rming how documents will be printed this way helps prevent printing errors.

For details on print previews,see ???Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing???. (???P.313)

Windows Software 341

Printer Driver

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing

(Windows)

This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.

2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3. Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. Select the L Open Preview When Print Job Starts check box.

5. After you click OK, when you print a job, the imagePROGRAF Preview window will be displayed.

Note

???If PageComposer is running, access the Special Settings dialog box from the Layout sheet and clear Enable Preview Switching.

342 Windows Software

Printer Driver

6. On the main window, you can check the layout and change settings as needed.

7. To print, click Start Printing in the File menu.

Note

??? For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, see Preview.

Windows Software 343

Printer Driver

Using Favorites (Windows)

This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.

Registering a favorite

Follow the steps below to save the current print settings as a favorite.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.

2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3. Complete the print settings.

4. Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.

5. Click H Add to display the Add dialog box.

6. Enter a desired name in Name, such as ???Photos for Presentations??? or ???Monthly Report.???

7. Choose a ???tting icon for these print settings in the Icon list.

8. In Comment, enter a description of the favorite to be added, as desired.

9. Click OK to close the Add dialog box.

The favorite you have added is now displayed in A Favorites.

Note

??? To save a favorite as a ???le, click J Export and specify the ???le to save.

344 Windows Software

Printer Driver

Printing using the favorite

Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.

2. Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3. Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.

4. In the A Favorites, choose the favorite you registered.

Note

???To import a favorite, click I Import and specify the favorite ???le.

5.Click D Apply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings.

6.Con???rm the print settings and print as desired.

Note

???For instructions on con???rming print settings,see ???Con???rming Print Settings (Windows)???. (???P.340)

Windows Software 345

Printer Driver

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows)

1. Choose Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.

2. Select the printer, and then display the printer driver dialog box.

Note

???The dialog box for specifying printing conditions varies depending on the source application. In some cases, when you select the printer, a sheet for con???guring the printer driver is added to the dialog box. In the following case, click Preferences.

???Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software

Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main, Page Setup, Layout,

Favorites, Utility, and Support.

Note

???The titles of dialog boxes may vary depending on the application, and sheets other than these six sheets may be displayed.

346 Windows Software

Printer Driver

Important

???If you access the printer driver dialog box from the source application, changes you make to the settings will only apply temporarily to that application. Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you exit the application.

???You can also access the printer driver dialog box from the Windows system menu.

To use the settings continuously in all applications, open the printer driver from the system menu to make the settings.

see ???Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows)???. (???P.348)

Windows Software 347

Printer Driver

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows)

1. Click start > Printers and Faxes (or Printers).

2. Select the printer, and then display the printer properties dialog box.

3. Click Printing Preferences to display the Printing Preferences dialog box, titled with the name of this printer.

Note

??? The Device Settings sheet is also an extension of the printer driver. (???P.377)

348 Windows Software

Printer Driver

Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main, Page Setup, Layout,

Favorites, Utility, and Support.

Important

???If you access the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu, changes you make to the settings will apply to all applications you use for printing.

???You can also access the printer driver dialog box from applications.

see ???Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows)???. (???P.346)

Windows Software 349

Printer Driver

Main Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Main sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help ???le.

Note

???On the Main sheet, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the particular printing application, or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

Common Items

A Media Type

Select the type of paper.

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

B Get Information

Displays Paper Information on Printer. You can update the printer driver settings for the feed source, media type, and roll width by selecting the feed source.

??? Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Windows) (???P.353)

C Advanced Settings

Displays Paper Detailed Settings. You can con???gure the printing settings to match the type of media, such as the ink drying time.

??? Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (???P.354)

L Open Preview When Print Job Starts

If you turn this on, imagePROGRAF Preview starts before printing.

This allows you to check on-screen previews of documents before printing.

??? Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (???P.313)

M Status Monitor

Starts imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.

You can check the printer status, job status, and other conditions.

You can also set up email noti???cation if printer errors occur by completing the Email Notice settings. For details, refer to the Status Monitor help ???le.

350 Windows Software

Printer Driver

N About

Displays version information for the printer driver.

S Defaults

Restores all settings on the sheet to the default values.

Con???guration using Easy Settings

E Print Target

Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.

???Printing Photos and Images (???P.152)

???Printing Line Drawings and Text (???P.160)

???Printing Of???ce Documents (???P.171)

Depending on the A Media Type setting, some E Print Target options may not be available.

F Print Quality

Choose the level of print quality.

??? Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing (???P.187)

G View Settings

Displays the Print Target setting values.

You can view and change the order of Print Target setting values.

??? View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Windows) (???P.355)

Windows Software 351

Printer Driver

Con???guration using Advanced Settings

E Print Priority

Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.

??? Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing (???P.187)

F Print Quality

Choose the level of print quality.

??? Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing (???P.187)

G Color Mode

Choose the color mode.

??? Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing (???P.187) Depending on the A Media Type setting, some G Color Mode options may not be available.

H Color Settings

Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings.

??? Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (???P.177)

I Thicken Fine Lines

Activate this option to print ???ne lines more distinctly.

J Unidirectional Printing

Select this checkbox to prevent problems such as misaligned lines and improve the print quality. However, the printing speed becomes slower.

K Sharpen Text

Activate this option to print text more sharply.

T Economy Printing

Select this checkbox to reduce the amount of ink consumed during printing. However, the print quality is worse than for normal printing.

Select this mode if you want to conserve ink when checking drawings, for example. Depending on the A Media Type and F Print Quality settings, this mode may not be available.

352 Windows Software

Printer Driver

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Windows)

On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and con???gure printer driver settings for the paper source and media type.

Note

???To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main sheet, click Get Information by Media Type. (???P.350)

A Paper Source

Shows the Paper Source supported by the printer, as well as information about the loaded paper. To update the Paper Source and media type settings in the printer driver, select the desired Paper Source option and click OK.

Windows Software 353

Printer Driver

Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows)

The Paper Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Note

???To display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main sheet, click Settings by Media Type. (???P.350)

A Drying Time

Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying Time setting is only valid for rolls.

??? (???P.127)

B Between Pages

Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the paper, as needed.

C Between Scans

Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until printing the next line, as needed.

D Roll Paper Margin for Safety

You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held ???rmly against the Platen.

E Near End Margin

Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the roll, as needed.

F Cut Speed

Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.

G Mirror

Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.

354 Windows Software

Printer Driver

View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Windows)

In the View Settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.

Note

???To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main sheet, click View Settings by Print Target. (???P.350)

A Print Target

Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).

B Name

Identi???es the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.

C Details

Here, you can con???rm detailed settings values for each listed item for the selected Print Target.

Windows Software 355

Printer Driver

Color Adjustment Sheet: Color (Windows)

If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment sheet.

Note

???To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings. (???P.350)

A Sample Type

Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or Graphics.

B View Color Pattern

Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.

C Apply to Sample

Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.

D Cyan / E Magenta / F Yellow

Fine-tune color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.

G Gray Tone

Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged with blue) or Warm Black (tinged with red).

H Brightness

Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen).

I Contrast

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.

356 Windows Software

Printer Driver

Saturation

Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Saturation makes colors more subdued.

K Object Adjustment

Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.

S Defaults

Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.

Note

??? For details on settings items,see ???Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver???. (???P.177)

Windows Software 357

Printer Driver

Object Adjustment dialog box: Color

In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.

Note

??? To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.

A Image

Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.

B Graphics

Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.

C Text

Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.

358 Windows Software

Printer Driver

Matching Sheet (Windows)

On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices.

Driver Matching Mode

The following options are available when you select Driver Matching Mode in the A Matching Mode list.

Note

???To display the Matching sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click the Matching sheet. (???P.350)

A Matching Mode

Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.

Normally, select Driver Matching Mode. For color matching based on ICC pro???les, select ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode, or Host ICM Mode, depending on your color matching system. If you prefer not to use the printer driver for color matching, select No.

B Matching Method

Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed. Various Matching Method options are available depending on your selection in Matching Mode.

Note

??? For details on settings items,see ???Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver???. (???P.177)

Windows Software 359

Printer Driver

ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode and Host ICM Mode

On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices. The following options are available when you select ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode, or Host ICM Mode on the A Matching Mode sheet.

Note

???To display the Matching sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click the Matching sheet. (???P.350)

A Matching Mode

Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.

B Input Pro???le Settings

You can select Image, Graphics, or Text. You can choose Matching Method and Input Pro???le. Various options are available depending on your selected Matching Mode.

To apply the same input pro???le automatically for Graphics and Text, select Use the Same Pro???le for All Objects. To apply separate input pro???les to Graphics and Text, clear Use the Same Pro???le for All Objects and specify the individual settings.

C Printer Pro???le Settings

Specify the printer pro???le as desired. Normally, select Auto Settings.

Note

??? For details on settings items,see ???Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver???. (???P.177)

360 Windows Software

Printer Driver

Color Adjustment Sheet: Monochrome (Windows)

On the Color Adjustment sheet for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.

Note

???To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main sheet, click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings. (???P.350)

A Sample Type

Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or Graphics.

B View Color Pattern

Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.

C Apply to Sample

Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.

D Cyan / E Magenta / F Yellow

Not available.

G Gray Tone

Not available.

H Brightness

Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen).

I Contrast

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.

Windows Software 361

Printer Driver

J Saturation

Not available.

K Object Adjustment

Select this option to display the K Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.

S Defaults

Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.

Note

??? For details on settings items,see ???Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver???. (???P.177)

362 Windows Software

Printer Driver

Object Adjustment dialog box: Monochrome

In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.

Note

??? To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.

A Image

Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.

B Graphics

Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and circles.

C Text

Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.

Windows Software 363

Printer Driver

Page Setup Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Page Setup sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help ???le.

A Page Size

Select the page size as speci???ed in the source application.

For details on available page sizes,see ???Paper Sizes???. (???P.100)

B Borderless Printing

Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper is selected in the LPaper Source list. Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.

???Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (???P.232)

???Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (???P.239)

???Borderless Printing at Actual Size (???P.225)

D Fit Paper Size

Scales the document image to match the paper size.

E Scale to ???t Roll Paper Width

Scales the document image to match the roll width.

F Print Image with Actual Size

Prints documents at their actual size. This function is available when you have selected the size same as the width of Roll Paper for either the length or width of the document from the A Page Size list.

G Paper Size

Available when D Fit Paper Size is selected.

Choose the size of the paper you will print on.

For details on available paper sizes,see ???Paper Sizes???. (???P.100)

Paper sizes compatible with borderless printing are shown in the list.

364 Windows Software

Printer Driver

C Enlarged/Reduced Printing

Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.

???Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (???P.201)

???Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (???P.207)

???Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (???P.213)

D Fit Paper Size

Scales the document image to match the paper size.

E Fit Roll Paper Width

Scales the document image to match the roll width.

F Scaling

Resizes the document image based on a speci???ed scaling value. Enter a value in a range of ???5-600.???

G Paper Size

Choose the size of the paper you will print on.

For details on available paper sizes,see ???Paper Sizes???. (???P.100)

H Orientation

Choose the printing orientation.

??? Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (???P.321)

K Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)

Activate this setting to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before printing.

??? Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (???P.301)

L Paper Source

Choose the feed source, as desired.

Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in Media Type on the Main sheet.

M Roll Paper Width

Choose the roll width.

For details on available roll widths,see ???Paper Sizes???. (???P.100)

N Roll Paper Options

Complete optional roll paper settings. Click to display the Roll Paper Options dialog box.

Under A Automatic Cutting, you can specify Yes or No and Print Cut Guideline.

??? Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (???P.331)

Select B Banner Printing when printing multiple pages continuously.

??? Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (???P.275)

Windows Software 365

Printer Driver

P Output Method

Click to display the Output Method dialog box, which enables you to complete the Output Method and Name

of data to be saved settings.

O Size Options

Click to display the Paper Size Options dialog box, which enables you to register additional paper sizes or select the size system for use.

S Defaults

Restores all settings on the sheet to the default values.

366 Windows Software

Printer Driver

Paper Size Options Dialog Box (Windows)

In the Paper Size Options dialog box, you can create and register your own Custom Paper Size. The sizes you de???ne are listed with standard paper sizes for selection later as needed.

Note

???To display the Paper Size Options dialog box, on the Page Setup sheet, click Paper Size Options. (???P.364)

A Paper Size List

Shows the names and sizes of paper that can be used with the printer driver.

B Delete

Custom paper sizes created by users can be deleted from the A Paper Size List, as needed. However, they cannot be deleted in the following situations.

???If a standard paper size of the printer driver is selected.

???If an oversized paper size is selected.

???If a paper size in a red box is selected.

C Custom Paper Size Name

You can name Custom Paper Size as desired.

D Units

Specify the desired unit of measure for the Custom Paper Size height and width.

E Paper Size

Specify the desired Width and Height. You can make your selection from sizes that are compatible with

Borderless Printing by selecting Borderless Printing Size. To maintain the aspect ratio of the Width and Height as you resize the paper, select Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height.

F Add

Enables you to register the custom paper size you have speci???ed or overwrite an existing custom paper size.

Windows Software 367

Printer Driver

Layout Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Layout sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

A Page Layout

Activate this setting to select a particular page layout.

???Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (???P.280)

???Printing Posters in Sections (???P.286)

???Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (???P.269)

???Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (???P.450)

B Set

Click to display one of the following dialog boxes depending on the selection in A Page Layout. In these dialog boxes, you can specify layout details and which pages to print, as well as other settings.

???Page Layout Printing

???Pages to Print

???Free Layout Settings

C Watermark

Activating this option makes two settings available, Watermarks and D Edit Watermark.

??? Printing With Watermarks (???P.318)

Watermarks

Lists the provided watermarks. Choose the watermark to print.

D Edit Watermark

Click to display the Edit Watermark dialog box for creating your own, original watermark.

E Print Centered

Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper.

???Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (???P.289)

???Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (???P.295)

F Rotate 180 degrees

Activate this option to rotate document images by 180 degrees before printing.

368 Windows Software

Printer Driver

G No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper)

Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve the paper.

??? Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (???P.307)

H Copies

Enter the number of copies to print, in a range of ???1-999.???

Reverse Order

Activate this option to print pages in reverse order.

I Page Options

Click to display the Page Options dialog box, which enables you to complete settings for printing the user name, date, or page number in the header or footer.

J Special Settings

If the printing results are not as you expected, click this option to change how printing is processed.

S Defaults

Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.

Windows Software 369

Printer Driver

Page Options Dialog Box (Windows)

The Page Options dialog box offers the following settings.

Note

??? To display the Page Options dialog box, on the Layout sheet, click Page Options. (???P.368)

A Print Date

Select where the date is printed, as desired. To print the time as well, select B Print Time Also.

C Print User Name

Select where the user name is printed, as desired.

D Print Page Number

Select where the page number is printed, as desired.

E Format Settings

Click to display the Format Settings dialog box, which enables you to complete format-related settings.

Note

???If you specify the same position for multiple items, the items are printed from left to right in this order: date, user name, and page number.

???When you print multiple pages per sheet using Page Layout Printing or similar functions, these items will be printed for each page.

370 Windows Software

Printer Driver

Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows)

If the printing results are not as you expected, you can change how printing is processed in the Special Settings dialog box.

Note

??? To display the Special Settings dialog box, on the Layout sheet, click Special Settings. (???P.368)

A FineZoom Settings

This function is used in large-format printing. Normally, choose Auto. If documents are not printed correctly on large-format paper, it may help to select Yes, and if ???ne lines are not visible or if images are distorted when printed, it may help to select No.

B Application Color Matching Priority

You can give applications priority in color management.

C Enable Preview Switching

When this option is selected, PageComposer starts if you print with Open Preview When Print Job Starts selected on the Main sheet.

D Fast Graphic Process

If image colors are inconsistent in printed documents or if lines are printed in varying thicknesses, clearing this option may help produce the expected results.

Important

??? This function cannot be used on 64-bit version of Windows.

E Reduce Print Unevenness

If you are concerned about print unevenness, the printing results can be improved by selecting this option. However, printing may take longer for some images.

F Adjust faint lines

If ???ne lines are printed in colors that do not match the colors of other shapes, clearing this option may help produce the expected results. However, lines in some colors may appear broken.

Windows Software 371

Printer Driver

Favorites Sheet (Windows)

The following settings are available on the Favorites sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

A Favorites

Printing favorites you have created are listed with Default Settings favorites.

??? Using Favorites (???P.327)

B Settings Details

Displays details of the favorite selected in the A Favorites.

C Comment

Displays notes registered in the favorite.

D Apply Favorite

Click to change the current print settings to those of the favorite selected in the A Favorites.

E Application Settings Priority

Activate this setting to use settings values speci???ed in the source application in preference to favorite settings selected in the A Favorites, when clicking D Apply Favorite. For details on the settings items used in preference, refer to the printer driver help.

F Delete

Click to delete the selected favorite from the A Favorites list.

G Edit

Click to display the Edit dialog box, which enables you to change the name and icon for the favorite selected in the A Favorites list.

372 Windows Software

Printer Driver

H Add

Click to display the Add dialog box, which enables you to add the current print settings as a favorite.

I Import

Click to display the Open dialog box, which enables you to import favorite settings saved as a ???le.

J Export

Click to display the Save As dialog box, which enables you to save the favorite settings as a ???le.

K Up

Click to move the selected favorite up in the A Favorites list.

L Down

Click to move the selected favorite down in the A Favorites list.

Windows Software 373

Printer Driver

Utility Sheet (Windows)

The following items can be executed on the Utility sheet. For details on the utilities, refer to the relevant utility help.

A Maintenance

Click to start the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, which offers the following maintenance for the printer.

???Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) check

???Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning

???Head alignment adjustment

???Feed amount adjustment

B Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Click to launch Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (*1) (iR enlargement copy), which enables you to create hot folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and assign print settings to hot folders.

??? Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows) (???P.432) *1: For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

374 Windows Software

Printer Driver

Support Sheet (Windows)

On the Support sheet, you can view support information and the user???s manual.

A Support Information

Click to access the Canon support webpage, where you can ???nd the latest information on the printer and consumables, check for printer driver updates, and browse other information.

B User Manual

Click to view the printer user???s manual. This function requires the user???s manual to be installed on your computer.

C Settings Summaries

Click to display the View Settings dialog box, which enables you to con???rm the settings for the Main, Page

Setup, Layout, and Favorites sheets.

Windows Software 375

Printer Driver

Settings Summaries Dialog Box (Windows)

The Settings Summaries dialog box enables you to con???rm the settings for the Main, Page Setup, Layout, and Favorites sheets.

A Copy

Click to copy the settings information to the clipboard. You can paste the settings information into a ???le created with a text editor or similar application.

376 Windows Software

Printer Driver

Device Settings Sheet (Windows)

Many settings items on the printer properties sheets are controlled by Windows applications. However, the Device Settings sheet is for con???guring the printer, and it is an extension of the printer driver.

The following settings are available on the Device Settings sheet.

A Color Compatibility

Click to display the Color Compatibility dialog box, which enables you to adjust colors if you have selected

Color Mode > Color (CAD).

??? For details on color settings, see Specifying Colors and Printing CAD Drawings. (???P.167)

B About

You can display version information for the printer driver.

Windows Software 377

Preview

Preview

The Features of Preview

The main features of Preview are as follows.

???While viewing this screen, you can adjust layout settings of a document created with application software.

???You can not only adjust layout settings but also your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen, and you can print the preview screen as it is seen.

Note

???The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Preview settings.

Operating Environment

You can use the Preview in the following environments.

???Compatible Operating System

Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008

???Software that requires installation imagePROGRAF Printer Driver

378 Windows Software

Preview

Starting Preview

Follow the procedure below to start the Preview.

1. Start the apllication software which you use.

2. From the application software???s File menu, select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box.

Note

???Normally, select Print from the File menu.

3.On the Main sheet, click on the Open Preview When Print Job Starts check box. Click the OK button to save the settings.

4.

5.

On the Print dialog box in the apllication software, click the Print button.

Preview main window is displayed.

Windows Software 379

Preview

Preview Main Window

The Preview main window consists of the menu and tool bars, preview and dialog area and status bar.

Note

??? You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool bar.

Menu Bar

This allows you to select menus required for operations.

Tool Bar

This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.

380 Windows Software

Preview

Preview Area

You can check the settings you made in this area.

Dialog Area

This allows you to set the print conditions and perform a print job.

For more information about Dialog Area, see ???Dialog Area???. (???P.382)

Status Bar

This shows the message, Pages and Output Size.

Windows Software 381

Preview

Dialog Area

You can select the layout and print on the center.

Media Type / Paper Source /Paper Size

You can con???rm the information that is set.

Layout Selection

You can print which conserves paper by selecting the layout.

For more information about Layout Selection, see ???Printing with Selecting the Layout???. (???P.387)

Center Originals Across Roll

You can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer.

For more information about Center Originals Across Roll, see ???Print on the Center???. (???P.384)

Note

??? You cannot select this if Cut Sheet is selected in Paper Source.

???No Spaces at Top or Bottom???

You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or bottom.

For more information about ???No Spaces at Top or Bottom???, see ???Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom???. (???P.385)

Note

??? Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.

???Print??? Button

Click the button to start printing.

???Cancel??? Button

Click the button to stop printing.

382 Windows Software

Preview

Printer Information

You can con???rm the information acquired from the printer.

Update Printer Information Button

Click the button to update the printer information with connecting to the printer.

Status Monitor Button

Click the button to start Status Monitor.

Windows Software 383

Preview

Print on the Center

You can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer.

1. Click the Center Originals Across Roll check box on.

2. Click the ???Print??? button Printing on the center begins.

Note

??? You cannot select this if Cut Sheet is selected in Paper Source.

384 Windows Software

Preview

Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom

You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or bottom.

1. Click the ???No Spaces at Top or Bottom??? check box on.

2. Click the ???Print??? button.

Printing on the settings with no spaces at top or bottom begins.

Windows Software 385

Preview

Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees

You can select Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible or Use Driver Settings from the Options menu.

Rotate90DegreesIfPossible Rotates pages in portrait orientation 90 degrees before printing. Pages are only rotated if they can ???t lengthwise across the roll.

Selecting Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible or Placing a checkmark for Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve

Paper) on the printer driver

Selecting Use Driver Settings

386 Windows Software

Preview

Printing with Selecting the Layout

You can print which conserves paper by selecting the layout.

1. In Layout Selection, click the layout button to use.

Windows Software 387

Preview

Note

???Right Button or Left Button can be selected only when the rotated pages can ???t lengthwise across the roll.

???By clicking Right Button or Left Button, you can save paper by printing in landscape orientation on roll paper.

???You can select only Upper Button or Lower Button if Cut Sheet is selected.

The button is selected currently.

The button can be selected.

The button can not be selected.

2. Click the Start Printing button.

Printing on the selected layout begins.

388 Windows Software

Preview

Enlarge/Reduce the screen display

You can enlarge or reduce the screen display when you select Zoom from the View menu.

Note

??? You can also select the setting by clicking the ??? button on the tool bar.

Moving a Page

You can move a page to display when you select Go to Page from the View menu.

Note

??? You can also move a page by clicking on the tool bar.

Using the ruler

You can con???rm the layout with using the ruler.

???Switching the ruler Show/Hide

In the View menu, select Ruler to switch the ruler Show/Hide.

???Changing the ruler unit

You can set the ruler unit when you select Units from the View menu.

Windows Software 389

Free Layout

Free Layout

The Features of Free Layout

The main features of Free Layout are as follows.

???Allows you to lay out at will and print a document created with application software.

???You can not only lay out multiple pages on one page but also lay out and print a multiple-???le document on one page, or lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.

Note

???The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Free Layout settings.

Operating Environment

You can use the Free Layout in the following environments.

???Compatible Operating System

Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008

???Software that requires installation imagePROGRAF Printer Driver

Note

??? This function is not available on 64-bit version of Windows.

390 Windows Software

Free Layout

Starting Free Layout

Follow the procedure below to start the Free Layout.

1. Start the apllication software which you use.

2. From the application software???s ???File??? menu, select the printer setup menu to open the ???Print??? dialog box.

Note

???Normally, select ???Print??? from the ???File??? menu.

3.From the list, select the printer and select the ???Layout??? sheet.

Note

???Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.

4.In the ???Layout??? sheet, click on the ???Page Layout??? check box and select ???Free Layout??? from the list. Click the ???OK??? button to save the settings.

Note

???When you select ???Free Layout???, all other setting items will be disabled.

Windows Software 391

Free Layout

5. On the Print dialog box in the apllication software, click the Print button.

Free Layout main window is displayed.

392 Windows Software

Free Layout

Free Layout Main Window

The Free Layout main window consists of the menu and tool bars, layout area and status bar.

Note

??? You can use the ???View??? menu to show or hide the tool and status bar.

Menu Bar

This allows you to select menus required for operations.

Tool Bar

This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.

Layout Area

This allows you to lay out objects and edit the object size and orientation.

Windows Software 393

Free Layout

Status Bar

This shows the paper size, unit of length, and number of objects.

Detailed Settings

The printer driver opens when you select ???Detailed Settings??? from the ???File??? menu. The printer driver is used to con???gure basic settings to match the type of media loaded in the printer.

Refer to Printer Driver for details on the printer driver.

Note

???When you select the ???Detailed Settings???, the only three sheets displayed are the ???Main??? sheet, the ???Page Setup??? sheet, and the ???Layout??? sheet. Some of the printer driver settings may be disabled.

394 Windows Software

Free Layout

Preferences Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select ???Preferences??? from the ???File??? menu. This allows you to con???gure the preferences of Free Layout.

???Units???

Set the unit for paper length, margins, and so on.

???Gridlines???

You can input a grid line width value in numerical characters so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.

Note

???You can input between 10.0 and 200.0(mm) (between 0.39 and 7.88(inch)).

???You can change the numbers by clicking either ????????? button or ????????? button.

???Divisions???

You can change the number of divisions of grid lines so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.

Note

???You can input between 1 and 10.

???You can change the numbers by clicking either ????????? button or ????????? button.

???Grid Color???

Select the grid line color.

Auto Arrange Spacing

Change the object-to-object spacing to be applied in the operation of laying out objects automatically.

Note

???You can input between 0.0 and 100.0(mm) (between 0.00 and 3.94(inch)).

???You can change the numbers by clicking either ????????? button or ????????? button.

Windows Software 395

Free Layout

???Object Frame Style???

You can select the object frame style for printing.

The following settings are available for the object frame style.

396 Windows Software

Free Layout

Page Options Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select ???Page Options??? from the ???File??? menu. This allows you to con???gure the roll paper length, object layout order, and margins of Free Layout.

???Roll Paper Length???

Set the length of one page to print on roll paper.

The following settings are available for roll paper length.

Note

???Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.

???You can input between 203.2 and 18000.0(mm) (between 8.00 and 708.66(inch)).

???You can change the numbers by clicking either ????????? button or ????????? button.

???Order???

Set the object layout order.

The following settings are available for order.

Note

???When you have selected ???Roll Paper Length??? > ???Auto Settings??? and ???Paper Orientation??? > ???Vertical???, you can choose ???Upper Left to Right??? or ???Upper Right to Left???.

???When you have selected ???Roll Paper Length??? > ???Auto Settings??? and ???Paper Orientation??? > ???Horizontal???, you can choose ???Upper Left to Bottom??? or ???Lower Left to Top???.

Windows Software 397

Free Layout

???Margins???

You can input the paper margins in numerical characters.

Note

???You can input between 0.0 and 50.0(mm) (between 0.00 and 1.97(inch)).

???You can change the numbers by clicking either ????????? button or ????????? button.

Zoom Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select ???Zoom??? from the ???View??? menu. You can enlarge or reduce the screen display.

Scaling

Set the magni???cation for enlargement or reduction of the screen display.

Note

???You can input between 25 and 400.

???You can change the numbers by clicking ????????? button.

398 Windows Software

Free Layout

Format Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select ???Format??? from the ???Object??? menu after you select an object.

???Size??? Sheet

You can rotate, enlarge, or reduce an object.

Note

??? When the objects are not selected, you can not select ???Format???.

???Rotate???

When you place a checkmark here, you can select ???Rotate Right??? or ???Rotate Left???.

Note

??? When several objects are selected, you cannot select ???Rotate???.

???Enl./Red.???

When you place a checkmark here, you can select ???Scaling???, ???Fit Paper Size???, or ???Fit Photo Size???.

Note

???You can input between 25 and 600.

???You can change the numbers by clicking either ????????? button or ????????? button.

Windows Software 399

Free Layout

???Position??? Sheet

You can rotate, enlarge, or reduce an object.

Note

??? When the objects are not selected, you can not select ???Format???.

???Object Position???

You can move the object position by changing the values.

???Object Size???

You can con???rm the object size.

Note

??? When several objects are selected, you cannot display ???Object Size???.

400 Windows Software

Free Layout

Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page

You can lay out and print a multiple-???le document on one page.

1. From the application software???s ???File??? menu, select the printer setup menu to open the ???Print??? dialog box.

Note

???Normally, select ???Print??? from the ???File??? menu.

2.Click ???Properties??? to open the ???Properties??? dialog box.

3. In the ???Page Setup??? sheet, select Paper Source.

Windows Software 401

Free Layout

4. In the ???Layout??? sheet, click on the ???Page Layout??? check box and select ???Free Layout??? from the list.

Note

???When you select ???Free Layout???, all other setting items will be disabled.

5.Click the ???OK??? button to save the settings.

6.In the ???Print??? dialog box, select the pages to print and the number of copies, and click the ???OK??? button.

402 Windows Software

Free Layout

Free Layout starts, laying out the document created with application software in the layout area as an object.

7. Leaving Free Layout running, open other ???les with the application software and repeat the above steps.

Windows Software 403

Free Layout

Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page

You can lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.

1. From the application software???s ???File??? menu, select the printer setup menu to open the ???Print??? dialog box.

Note

???Normally, select ???Print??? from the ???File??? menu.

2.Click ???Properties??? to open the ???Properties??? dialog box.

3. In the ???Page Setup??? sheet, select Paper Source.

404 Windows Software

Free Layout

4. In the ???Layout??? sheet, click on the ???Page Layout??? check box and select ???Free Layout??? from the list.

Note

???When you select ???Free Layout???, all other setting items will be disabled.

5.Click the ???OK??? button to save the settings.

6.In the ???Print??? dialog box, select the pages to print and the number of copies, and click the ???OK??? button.

Windows Software 405

Free Layout

Free Layout starts, laying out the document created with application software in the layout area as an object.

7. Leaving Free Layout running, open other ???les with other application software and repeat the above steps.

406 Windows Software

Free Layout

Selecting an Object

When an object is selected, a select box (blue border) appears around the object.

Note

???To select an object, click that object.

???To select multiple successive objects, click them while holding down the Shift key.

???To select multiple arbitrary objects, click them while holding down the Ctrl key.

???To select all objects, select ???Select All??? from the ???Edit??? menu.

When you specify the area with dragging the mouse, the object in the area is selected.

Windows Software 407

Free Layout

Changing the Object Size

You can change the object size by means of mouse operation or by specifying a scaling value.

Note

??? The vertical-to-horizontal ratio remains unchanged when the object is enlarged or reduced.

Resizing by means of mouse operation

1. Select an object.

2. Place the pointer at a corner of the selection box around the object to show the arrow handle, and drag this handle to change the object size.

Resizing by specifying a scaling value

1. Select an object.

Click on the ???Enl./Red.??? checkbox in the Format Dialog Box (???P.399) and select ???Scaling???.

2. You either enter numbers directly.

Note

???You can input between 25 and 600.

???You can change the numbers by clicking either ????????? button or ????????? button.

3.Click the ???OK??? button.

408 Windows Software

Free Layout

Moving an Object

You can move the object position.

1. Select an object.

2. Place the pointer inside the selection box of the object to show the crosshair handle, and drag it to move the object.

Alternatively, you can move the ???Object Position??? by changing the values in ???Vertical Pos???, ???Horizontal Pos??? and ???Page Pos??? in the Format Dialog Box. (???P.399)

Rotating an Object

You can rotate the object.

1. Select an object.

2. Select ???Rotate Left 90 Degrees??? or ???Rotate Right 90 Degrees??? from the toolbar.

Alternatively, you may click on the ???Rotate??? check box in the Format Dialog Box (???P.399) then select ???Rotate Right??? or ???Rotate Left???, and click the ???OK??? button.

Windows Software 409

Free Layout

Laying out Objects Automatically

Click ???Auto Arrange Object??? in the tool bar. This automatically lays out objects. Alternatively, you may select ???Auto Arrange Object??? from the ???Object??? menu.

Note

???The object layout order varies depending on the ???Order??? setting in the Page Options Dialog Box (???P.397) dialog box.

410 Windows Software

Free Layout

Aligning Objects

You can align objects systematically.

1.

2.

Select multiple objects.

Click the align button from the toolbar.

Alternatively, you may select the align menu from the ???Object??? menu.

???Align Top???

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the top.

???Center Vertically???

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the vertical center.

???Align Bottom???

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the bottom.

Windows Software 411

Free Layout

???Align Left???

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the left.

???Center Horizontally???

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the horizontal center.

???Align Right???

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the right.

412 Windows Software

Free Layout

Changing the Object Overlapping Order

You can change the object overlapping order.

1. Select an object.

2. Select the Overlapping Order menu from the ???Object??? menu.

Note

???The order of overlapping affects the order of objects automatically laid out.

???You can also select by clicking the right button of the mouse on an object.

???Bring to Front???

Moves the object to the frontmost position.

???Send to Back???

Moves the object to the backmost position.

???Bring Forward???

Moves the object one position to the front.

Windows Software 413

Free Layout

???Send Backward???

Moves the object one position to the back.

414 Windows Software

Free Layout

Pasting a Copied or Cut Object

1. Click ???Copy??? or ???Cut??? from the toolbar.

Alternatively, you may select ???Copy??? or ???Cut??? from the ???Edit??? menu.

2. Click ???Paste??? from the toolbar.

Alternatively, you may select ???Paste??? from the ???Edit??? menu.

Note

???The copied or cut object is laid out at the end of the page.

???You can also select by clicking the right button of the mouse on an object.

???In order to paste an object on any position that you like, you can paste the object with ???Pointed Paste??? by clicking the right button of the mouse on any position that you want.

Windows Software 415

Free Layout

Folded Duplex Window

This window is displayed if you select ???Folded Duplex??? from the ???Edit??? menu after selecting an object. Using the ???Folded Duplex??? function allows you to print with fold lines added.

The Folded Duplex window consists of the menu and tool bars, layout area and status bar.

Note

??? The toolbar and status bar can be toggled between hidden and displayed from the ???View??? menu.

Menu Bar

This allows you to select menus required for operations.

Tool Bar

This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.

416 Windows Software

Free Layout

Layout Area

This allows you to check the arrangement and orientation of objects.

Status Bar

This shows the paper source, roll paper width, and output size.

Windows Software 417

Free Layout

Prints using Folded Duplex

Allows you to produce duplex printing by combining two pages and folding them.

???Folded Duplex???

Any two pages can be arranged and printed in a layout that becomes duplex on folding.

This can be used such as for advertising posters that are suspended from the ceiling.

1. Select two objects from the layout area of Free Layout.

2. Select Folded Duplex from the ???Edit??? menu of Free Layout.

Open the Folded Duplex window and arrange the selected objects in the layout area.

3. Open the ???Finished Size Settings??? dialog box from the ???Edit??? menu.

4. Select ???Fit Roll Paper Width??? or ???Specify Folded Size??? in ???Finished Size???.

Note

??????Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)??? is also available when ???Specify Folded Size??? is selected.

5.Click ???OK??? to save the settings.

6.Open the ???Binding Settings??? dialog box from the ???Edit??? menu.

7.Select ???Bottom??? or ???Top??? in ???Binding Edge???.

8.Specify the ???Binding??? width in ???Binding???.

9.Con???gure the Fold Line Color and Fold Line Type from Print Fold Lines.

Note

???When the Only Print Center and Edges checkbox is selected, fold lines are only printed at the three locations of the center and both edges.

10.Click ???OK??? to save the settings.

11.Con???rm the print setting and begin printing.

418 Windows Software

Free Layout

Finished Size Settings Dialog Box

This dialog box is displayed when you select ???Finished Size Settings??? from the ???Edit??? menu. This allows you to con???gure ???nished size settings.

???Finished Size???

Selects the method for setting the ???nished size.

The following settings are available for the ???nished size.

Windows Software 419

Free Layout

Binding Settings Dialog Box

This is displayed when you select ???Binding Settings??? from the ???Edit??? menu. This allows you to con???gure the binding edge settings.

???Binding Edge???

Con???gures the binding edge when folding paper.

The following settings are available for the binding edge.

???Binding???

Con???gures the binding margin (gutter).

Prints by creating a binding margin (gutter) of the speci???ed size. Enter the margin size as a number.

Note

??? The values that can be entered are 0 to 50 (mm).

???Print Fold Lines???

Con???gures the color and type of fold lines.

Note

??? To not print fold lines, clear the ???Print Fold Lines??? checkbox.

???Fold Line Color???

You can select the fold lines.

???Fold Line Type???

You can select the fold lines.

The following settings are available for the fold line type.

???Only Print Center and Edges???

To print fold lines at the center and both edges, select the Only Print Center and Edges checkbox.

420 Windows Software

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

The main features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy are as follows.

???Allows the document scanned with the Color imageRUNNER to be automatically enlarged and printed.

???You can perform basic printer settings such as printer selection, media type and output pro???le selection, and matching methods, in addition to borderless printing and enlargement/reduction process without growing through the printer driver.

Note

???The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy settings.

Operating Environment

You can use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy in the following environments.

???Compatible Operating System

Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008

???Software that requires installation imagePROGRAF Printer Driver

Note

??? This function is not available on 64-bit version of Windows.

Windows Software 421

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Follow the procedure below to start the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

To start by selecting ???Printers and Faxes??? from the ???start??? button

1. From the Windows ???start??? button, select ???Printers and Faxes??? to open the ???Printers and Faxes??? dialog box.

2. Right-click the Printers icon and select ???Print Settings??? to open the ???Printing Preferences??? dialog box.

In the ???Utility??? sheet, click the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? button.

3. The ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box displays.

Note

???If you click on the ???Add to Startup folder??? check box in the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box, the icon of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility will appear on the task bar when starting Windows thereafter.

422 Windows Software

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

To start by selecting ???imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? from the ???start??? button

1. From the Windows ???start??? button, select ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy???.

2. The ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box displays.

Windows Software 423

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box

The explanation below is on the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box.

Note

???For the step to open the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box, see ???Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy???. (???P.422)

???Hot Folder???

The hot folder list appears.

???Add??? Button

Click the button to open the ???Easy Setup Wizard??? dialog box so that you can add a hot folder.

???Edit??? Button

From the ???Hot Folder??? list, select a hot folder and click the button to open the ???Add/Edit Hot Folder??? dialog box that allows you to edit the hot folder.

???Delete??? Button

From the ???Hot Folder??? list, select a hot folder and click the button to delete the hot folder.

???Start??? Button

Clicking the button changes the status of the selected ???inactive??? Hot Folder to ???active???.

???Stop??? Button

Clicking the button changes the status of the selected ???active??? Hot Folder to ???inactive???.

???Add to Startup folder???

Register the application in the Windows startup menu.

???Save Printed Data???

Automatically saves printed data.

???About??? Button

Click the button to display the name and the version number of the utility.

???Operation Guide??? Button

Click the button to display the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual???.

424 Windows Software

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Hot Folder

Hot folder refers to a folder used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

???When transferred to the PC???s hot folder, the document data scanned with the Color imageRUNNER is printed in enlarged size from the printer according to the print conditions set in the hot folder.

???You can create a new hot folder, edit or delete an existing one, and set print conditions at will.

Note

??? You can create up to 20 hot folders.

Windows Software 425

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Creating a New Hot Folder

1. Open the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box, and then click the ???Add??? button.

Note

???For the step to open the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box, see ???Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy???. (???P.422)

2.The ???Easy Setup Wizard??? dialog box displays. Click the ???Next??? button.

3. Select the type of printer to use.

Click the ???Next??? button.

426 Windows Software

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

4. Select the media type to print.

Note

???If the ???Borderless Printing??? checkbox is checked, only media types that can be used for borderless printing are displayed in the list.

Click the ???Next??? button.

5. Select roll paper or cut sheet to print. Also, select the media size to print. Click the ???Next??? button.

6. Select the color matching method. Click the ???Next??? button.

Windows Software 427

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

7. To receive a document scanned with the Color imageRUNNER, you need to share a folder. Enter the folder shared name in Shared Name.

Click the ???Next??? button.

Note

???This shared name is used as the name of the hot folder.

???You cannot use the ???Back??? button, after clicking the ???Next??? button here.

8. Click ???Finish??? button to close the ???Easy Setup Wizard??? dialog box.

The hot folder you have created appears in the ???Hot Folder??? list in the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box.

428 Windows Software

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder

1. Share the folder you want to specify as a hot folder.

2. Open the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box, and then click the ???Add??? button.

Note

???For the step to open the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box, see ???Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy???. (???P.422)

3.The ???Easy Setup Wizard??? dialog box displays. Click the ???Manual Settings??? button.

4. The ???Add/Edit Hot Folder??? dialog box displays. Enter the hot folder name in ???Name???.

Click the ???Browse??? botton, with selecting ???Specify a folder???, to set the existing shared folder.

Windows Software 429

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

5. The location of the folders will appear.

Select the folder to specify a hot folder, and click the ???OK??? button.

6. As necessary, set the print conditions in the hot folder. (???P.431) Click the ???OK??? button to close the ???Add/Edit Hot Folder??? dialog box.

The hot folder you have created appears in the ???Hot Folder??? list in the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box.

430 Windows Software

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Setting the Print Parameters

The printer driver opens when you click the ???Properties??? button in the ???Add/Edit Hot Folder??? dialog box. The printer driver is used to con???gure basic settings to match the type of media loaded in the printer.

Refer to Printer Driver for details on the printer driver.

Note

???The only three sheets displayed are the ???Main??? sheet, the ???Page Setup??? sheet, and the ???Layout??? sheet. Some of the printer driver settings may be disabled.

???Apply Sharpness???

Place a checkmark here to set the sharpness.

Drag the slider bar to the left or right to adjust. You can also adjust by directly entering a number in the numeric input ???eld.

Note

???You can input between 0 and 500.

???You can change the numbers by clicking either ????????? button or ????????? button.

???You cannot be applied to PDF ???les.

Windows Software 431

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows)

Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.

Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.

This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.

To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, ???rst complete these settings in the following order.

1.Register a hot folder on your computer.

Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER and complete the settings for enlargement copy.

2.Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.

Con???gure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.

After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER.

Registering a hot folder on your computer

Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders. Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. You can specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.

1. Display the printer driver dialog box. (???P.348)

2. Click the Utility tab to display the Utility sheet.

3. Click Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy to start the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility.

4. Use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility to register or modify hot folders. For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help ???le for the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility.

432 Windows Software

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.

Con???gure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the Color imageRUNNER.

For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button, refer to the setting manual, displayed by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility, or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.

Scanning the original and print an enlargement

Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer. For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.

1. Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.

2. Press Send to display the screen for transmission.

3. Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.

4. Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all originals, press Done on the touch-panel display.

Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the conditions you speci???ed for the folder.

Note

???For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, refer to Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

Windows Software 433

Status Monitor

Status Monitor

The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

imagePROGRAF Status Monitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.

Two screens are available in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor : ???Printer List??? shows a list of printers, and ???Status Monitor??? shows details for each printer.

???You can view a list of the printers for which printer drivers have been installed on your computer, printers connected to your computer, and printers found on the network.

???If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.

???Images of Ink Tanks are shown, with different images for various types of ink. An icon and warning message will notify you when ink levels are low.

???The type of paper loaded in each media source is identi???ed. You can also check to see if paper has run out.

???This way, the utility enables you to check printer information and take care of printer maintenance for optimal printing results.

???You can also set up automatic email noti???cation of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you designate in advance.

???You can use the Accounting Manager to collect the print job logs for the printers and check information such as the printing costs.

For details of the Accounting Manager, see Accounting Manager. (???P.437)

434 Windows Software

Status Monitor

Note

??? For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.

Windows Software 435

Status Monitor

Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

You can use the ???Job??? sheet in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor for operations such as pausing and canceling print jobs.

Preempting Other Jobs

If you select a print job and click the ???Preempt??? button, the selected job is printed ahead of the job that currently precedes it in the print queue.

Pausing/Resuming Print Jobs

Selecting a print job and clicking the ???Pause??? button pauses printing of the selected job. To resume printing of a paused print job, select the print job and click the ???Resume??? button.

Note

???Once all the print data for a print job has been sent to the printer, the job can no longer be paused/resumed.

Canceling Print Jobs

Selecting a print job and clicking the ???Cancel Job??? button cancels printing of the selected job.

Note

??? You cannot cancel other users??? print jobs.

Printing Held Jobs

Printing of the job with a ???Status??? of ???Holding??? is paused because the paper speci???ed by the driver does not match the paper currently loaded in the printer.

Use the procedure below to print the held job.

1. Select the held job and click the ???Replace Paper??? button.

2. Replace the paper in the printer with the correct paper.

Note

???To continue printing without changing the paper in the printer, select the held job and click ???Continue to print??? button.

436 Windows Software

Accounting

Accounting

Accounting Manager

The Accounting Manager stores the printer???s print job logs so that you can use the information for checking printing costs, etc.

The bene???ts of using the Accounting Manager are outlined below.

???Print Job Log Collection

This allows you to check which documents were printed from each printer, who printed them and when.

???Calculation of the Total Pages Used and the Total Cost

This allows you to use the collected print job logs to calculate totals for items such as the number of pages printed, the amount of paper used and the printing costs incurred.

???Regular Data Acquisition for Print Jobs

This automatically logs print jobs at regular intervals.

???Exporting Print Job Data

This allows you to export collected print job data as a CSV ???le.

Important

???The Accounting Manager in Status Monitor displays approximate estimates of the amount of paper consumed and the ink consumed per printed page. Canon cannot guarantee the accuracy of these estimates. These estimates will also vary depending on the conditions of printer use.

Launching the Accounting Manager

The procedure for launching the Accounting Manager is shown below.

1.

2.

Open the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor window.

Select ???Accounting??? in the ???Accounting??? menu.

Or, open the ???Accounting??? sheet and click the ???Accounting??? button.

Windows Software 437

Accounting

Accounting Manager Main Window

The Accounting Manager main window consists of a title bar, menu bar, toolbars, listed job selection area, job list area, totals area and status bar.

Title Bar

This displays the printer model, its serial number and the port number it is using.

Menu Bar

Allows you to select the menu options required for operation.

Toolbars

Provide tool buttons and pull-down menus for the main operations.

Note

??? You can opt to either show or hide the toolbars in the ???View??? menu.

438 Windows Software

Accounting

Listed Job Selection Area

You can use this area to select which job log is displayed.

If you are using regular data acquisition, this area allows you to view the collective job logs for each speci???ed period.

For more information on how to select the job logs displayed, see Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs. (???P.447)

Job List Area

This area lists the details of acquired jobs.

It displays a list of either the print jobs on the printers or the regularly acquired print jobs. The displayed information includes the amounts of paper and ink consumed, the costs, the media type and the time taken for printing.

Windows Software 439

Accounting

Totals Area

Displays the total costs for the selected job and the amounts of paper and ink consumed.

Note

???If you are viewing regularly acquired print jobs, selecting a period on the left side of the window displays the total costs for that period and the amounts of paper and ink consumed.

Status Bar

Displays messages and other information.

440 Windows Software

Accounting

Accounting Manager Basic Procedures

The ???rst time you use the Accounting Manager, use the following procedures to con???gure the settings.

1. Con???gure unit costs, including the costs of ink and paper.

For details of the unit cost settings, see Con???guring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager. (???P.441)

2. Set options such as the units displayed.

For details of the unit settings, see Con???guring Units and Display Settings in Accounting Manager. (???P.445)

3. If you are using Regular Data Acquisition, con???gure the Regular Data Acquisition settings. For details of the Regular Data Acquisition settings, see Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Intervals. (???P.446)

4. Specify the jobs to be listed.

For details of how to select the job logs displayed, see Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs. (???P.447)

This displays the required print job logs and lists the details.

Con???guring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager

Select ???Unit Costs??? in the ???Settings??? menu to open the ???Unit Costs??? dialog box. Con???gure the unit cost settings in this dialog box.

Note

???When you select a job and then open the ???Unit Costs??? dialog box, items with unit costs that have not yet been con???gured for that job are shown highlighted.

???Setting the Unit Cost for Ink (???P.442)

???Setting the Unit Cost for Paper (???P.443)

???Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper (???P.444)

Windows Software 441

Accounting

Setting the Unit Cost for Ink

Open the ???Ink??? sheet. Set the unit cost for ink in this sheet.

To set the same unit cost for all the inks

1. Select the ???Use same price for all ink??? checkbox.

2. Enter the ???Tank Capacity??? and ???Price???.

3. Click the ???OK??? button.

Important

??? Your settings are not applied until you click the ???OK??? button.

To set different unit costs for each ink color

1. Select the ink color to be costed.

2. Enter the ???Tank Capacity??? and ???Price???.

3. Click the ???Overwrite??? button.

4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for all the inks.

5. Click the ???OK??? button.

Important

??? Your settings are not applied until you click the ???OK??? button.

442 Windows Software

Accounting

Setting the Unit Cost for Paper

Open the ???Paper??? sheet. Set the unit cost for paper in this sheet.

1. Select a media type from the ???Media Type??? list.

2. Enter the ???Width???, ???Length??? and ???Price???.

3. Click the ???Add??? button. To change the unit cost for a media type you have already set, click the ???Overwrite??? button.

4. Click the ???OK??? button.

Important

??? Your settings are not applied until you click the ???OK??? button.

Windows Software 443

Accounting

Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper

Open the ???Other??? sheet. Use this sheet to set any price for items other than inks and paper.

1. Enter any name in the ???Name??? ???eld.

2. Enter a value in ???Unit Cost???.

3. Use ???Allocated??? to specify whether the costs are allocated as being incurred by the print job.

4. Click the ???Add??? button. To change the unit cost for a media type you have already set, click the ???Overwrite??? button.

5. Click the ???OK??? button.

Note

??? You can set unit costs for up to 5 items.

Important

??? Your settings are not applied until you click the ???OK??? button.

444 Windows Software

Accounting

Con???guring Units and Display Settings in Accounting

Manager

Select ???Units and Display??? in the ???Settings??? menu to open the ???Units and Display??? dialog box. Use this dialog box to con???gure the display settings.

???Date Display Format???

Use this option to select the display format for dates. "YYYY" indicates the year, "MM" the month and "DD" the day.

???Currency Unit???

Enter the currency unit. Enter a text string up to 3 characters long.

???1000 Separator???

Use this option to select the symbol used as a separator in numbers. The symbol is inserted every 3 digits.

???Decimal Symbol???

Use this option to select the symbol used as a decimal point.

???Ink Consumed???

Use this option to select the unit used for ink consumption.

???Paper Width???

Use this to select the unit used for paper width.

???Paper Length???

Use this to select the unit used for paper length.

???Area Display Format???

Use this to select the unit used for paper area.

Windows Software 445

Accounting

Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular

Intervals

This feature collects print job logs from the printer at regular intervals and saves the logs on your computer.

1. Select ???Regular Data Acquisition??? in the ???Settings??? menu.

2. Select ???Acquire print job logs regularly???.

3. Click the ???OK??? button to close the dialog box.

Note

???Immediately after you con???gure Regular Data Acquisition, no print jobs are displayed. Wait a few moments and then select ???Refresh??? in the ???View??? menu to display the print jobs.

???A maximum of 10,000 records are saved in a print job log. If this number is exceeded, jobs are deleted from the log starting from the oldest record. To save old data, it is recommended that you export

the data as a CSV ???le.

For details of how to export print job logs as CSV ???les, see Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File. (???P.447)

Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition

You can use this procedure to cancel the regular acquisition of print job logs from printers.

1. Select ???Regular Data Acquisition??? in the ???Settings??? menu.

2. Uncheck the ???Acquire print job logs regularly??? option.

3. Click the ???OK??? button to close the dialog box.

446 Windows Software

Accounting

Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs

The print job logs displayed by the Status Monitor Accounting Manager contain two types of job: Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs.

You can select whether to display Jobs on Printer or Regularly Acquired Jobs in the Listed Job Selection Area on the left side of the window.

???Jobs on Printer???

This shows a list of the print jobs currently held on printers.

You can change the number of jobs displayed per page using the ???Print Jobs Shown Per Page??? setting in the ???View??? menu or the toolbar.

You can skip to a particular page using the ???Go to??? option in the ???View??? menu or the toolbar.

Note

???For printers with built-in hard disks, you can view up to 500 print jobs per printer.

???For printers without built-in hard disks, you can view up to 32 print jobs per printer. However, only 10 jobs can be displayed if the printer is switched off.

???Regularly Acquired Jobs???

This shows a list of regularly acquired print jobs.

To view all the jobs in a set period, specify the period using ???Period??? and then ???Starting Date??? (or ???Starting Day of Week??? or ???Starting Month???) in the ???View??? menu or the toolbar.

For example, to view monthly job logs starting on the 1st of each month, set ???Period??? to ???Monthly??? and set ???Starting Date??? to ???1???.

Note

??? Up to 10,000 regularly acquired jobs are displayed for each printer.

Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File

You can export the collected print job data in the form of a CSV ???le by selecting ???Export Job Cost Data??? in the ???File??? menu.

Note

??? You can also select ???Export Job Cost Data??? using the icon in the toolbar.

???Selected Jobs???

Exports the data for the selected print jobs in the job list as a CSV ???le.

Note

??? You can select multiple jobs by holding down the Shift key or Ctrl key as you click the job names.

???Listed Jobs???

Exports the data for the print jobs currently displayed in the list as a CSV ???le.

Windows Software 447

Accounting

Showing Job Properties

If you select a job in the job list and then select ???Show Job Properties??? in the ???File??? menu, the ???Job Properties??? dialog box appears, allowing you to check information such as detailed cost data.

You can copy text-based information in this dialog box to the clipboard by clicking the ???Copy??? button.

Note

???You can also open this dialog box by right-clicking the selected job and selecting ???Show Job Properties???. Or you can also use the toolbar icon to open the dialog box.

???If you select multiple jobs and open the ???Job Properties??? dialog box, the total costs for the selected jobs are displayed.

Showing, Saving and Loading Selected Unit Cost Data

???Show Unit Cost Data???

Select ???Show Unit Cost Data??? in the ???File??? menu to open the ???Unit Cost Data??? dialog box. This lists the unit costs for items such as the selected ink and paper.

You can copy text-based information in this dialog box to the clipboard by clicking the ???Copy??? button.

???Save Unit Cost Data???

Select a destination folder using ???Save Unit Cost Data??? in the ???File??? menu. The unit cost data for items such as the selected ink and paper is saved as a ???le.

???Load Unit Cost Data???

Selecting ???Load Unit Cost Data??? in the ???File??? menu loads saved unit cost data.

Showing the Total Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed

Select ???Show Ink and Paper Consumed??? in the ???File??? menu to open the ???Show Ink and Paper Consumed??? dialog box.

This lists the total amounts of ink and paper consumed by the printer so far.

You can copy text-based information in this dialog box to the clipboard by clicking the ???Copy??? button.

Note

???Up to 7 types of media are listed in order of the amount consumed. The total consumption for other media types is shown as ???Other???.

448 Windows Software

Digital Photo Front-Access

Digital Photo Front-Access

Digital Photo Front-Access

Digital Photo Front-Access is an application that links photos from Canon digital cameras and other image ???les on your computer with various other applications.

???Simply select an image and click the icon of the application you want to start to launch the application.

???You can also print from Digital Photo Front-Access. In short, Digital Photo Front-Access can help you manage images in many ways from editing to printing as an effective way to work with other applications.

???Digital Photo Front-Access also enables image retouching. For automatic retouching, select an image for retouching and click Image Adjustment.

???Because this application automates the work???ow from retouching to display for all of your images, it can save time and work in retouching.

Note

??? For details, refer to the Digital Photo Front-Access help.

Windows Software 449

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals

You can print a variety of source documents from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or screen shots from web browsers after composing an original with them using PosterArtist.

This topic describes how to use PosterArtist to compose originals from multiple applications, creating a poster layout for printing.

Important

???This function is only supported in Windows.

???PosterArtist (sold separately) must be installed to use this function.

1.Choose ???Print??? in the application menu.

2.Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (???P.346)

3.Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.

4. Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.

450 Windows Software

Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals

5. Select the A Page Layout check box.

6. Click in the Edit Using PosterArtist in the A Page Layout list.

7. When you attempt to print, PosterArtist starts up and the PageCapture window is displayed. (At this point, the document will not be printed yet.)

8. Choose the page to load in PosterArtist.

9. Edit and rearrange the image in the PosterArtist window as desired.

Important

???Without closing the PosterArtist window, repeat steps 1-8 to arrange originals from multiple applications on the same page.

Note

???For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the PosterArtist Manual.

10.Print from the PosterArtist menu.

Windows Software 451

Device Setup Utility

Device Setup Utility

imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility is a utility to establish communication between the printer and your computer by completing relevant settings. After the printer is installed, for example, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility to complete the network settings initially.

???Starting imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility will show a list of printers found on the network. In this list, select the printer (speci???cally, the printer???s MAC address) that you want to set up, and then con???gure the basic settings from your computer, such as the printer???s IP address and the network frame type.

???You can see which printers are online in the network by checking the printer list. Communication between your computer and these printers is possible.

Note

???We recommend that your network or printer administrator complete the setup work using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

???For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility help.

Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer as follows:

Important

???In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008, you must log on with administrative rights equivalent to the ???Administrator??? account.

1.Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.

2.On the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software.

3.Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

4.Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.

452 Windows Software

Device Setup Utility

Con???guring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

On a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the printer to con???gure the printer???s IP address. This topic describes how to con???gure the IP address using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Important

???To con???gure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as ???Administrator??? account. We recommend that your network administrator con???gure the network settings.

???For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see ???Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility???. (???P.452)

When specifying an IPv4 IP address

1. Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.

2. In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to con???gure.

3. Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.

4. Select the IPv4 tab.

5. In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual.

6. Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.

7. Click OK after the Con???rmation message is displayed.

8. Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Note

???To con???gure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select

DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP.

???You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.

When specifying an IPv6 IP address

1. Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.

2. In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to con???gure.

3. Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.

4. Select the IPv6 tab.

5. In IPv6, select On.

6. When there is an IPv6-compatible router in the network environment, select On in Stateless Address.

Additionally, when there is an DHCPv6-compatible server in the network environment, select

On in DHCPv6.

Note

???When there is no IPv6-compatible router or DHCPv6-compatible server, select On in Manual and enter the IPv6 Address and Pre???x Length.

7.Click Set.

8.Click OK after the Con???rmation message is displayed.

9.Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Windows Software 453

Printer Driver

Mac OS X Software

Printer Driver

Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)

For instructions on accessing the Mac OS X printer driver, refer to the following topics.

??? Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Mac OS X) (???P.460)

For information on the Mac OS X printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.

???Main Pane (Mac OS X) (???P.461)

You can specify the media type, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings. Choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

???Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X) (???P.465)

???View settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Mac OS X) (???P.466)

???Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X) (???P.467)

???Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X) (???P.469)

???Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X) (???P.471)

You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the orientation, the paper size and source, and automatic cutting.

???Utility Pane (Mac OS X) (???P.473)

You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

???Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X) (???P.474)

You can specify settings for how print jobs are sent to the printer.

???Support Pane (Mac OS X) (???P.475)

You can view support information and the user???s manual.

With the imagePROGRAF Free Layout feature, you can arrange originals from various source applications on a single page before printing. For details, see Free Layout.

With the imagePROGRAF Preview feature, you can check the layout before printing and adjust layout or size settings while viewing a preview screen. For details, see Preview.

With the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy feature, you can automatically enlarge and print scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER. For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

454 Mac OS X Software

Printer Driver

Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)

If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.

1. This sets the B Format for and C Paper Size.

Note

???The con???guration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using. If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu, the settings are con???gured by opening the

Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup.

If it is not displayed, the settings are con???gured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu.

2. Select the printer in the A Printer list.

3. Choose the original size in the F Paper Size list.

4. If you con???gured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box, click F OK to close the dialog box, and then select Print from the application software menu.

5. Access the Main pane.

6. In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.

Mac OS X Software 455

Printer Driver

7. Access the Page Setup pane.

8. In the A Paper Source list, select how paper is supplied.

9. If you have selected Manual in A Paper Source, make sure the size as selected in Page Setup is displayed in C Page Size. If you have selected Roll Paper in A Paper Source, make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Width.

Note

???If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Width, click L Printer Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.

Note

???A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications. For details on available printing conditions, see ???Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)???. (???P.454)

456 Mac OS X Software

Printer Driver

Con???rming Print Settings (Mac OS X)

There are two ways to con???rm what printing conditions have been speci???ed, as follows.

???Checking a preview of the settings

???Checking a print preview

Checking a preview of the settings

A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, Utility, and Additional Settings panes.By checking images and numerical values in the preview, you can con???rm current settings for the page size, orientation, paper source, and so on.

Pane displayed when the H On top, illustrations indicate the page size of the original, the paper size, Images tab is clicked orientation, layout, borderless printing selection, color mode, and other

settings information.

Under this, the page size, paper size, and method and percentage of enlargement or reduction is displayed.

Note

???To con???rm the Print Target speci???ed in Easy Settings, click G View set. on the Main pane to display the View settings dialog box.

Mac OS X Software 457

Printer Driver

Checking a print preview

You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed. Con???rming the image of print jobs beforehand helps prevent printing errors.

For details on print previews,see ???Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing???. (???P.313)

458 Mac OS X Software

Printer Driver

Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (Mac OS X)

This topic describes how to check the layout before printing using the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview function.

1. Choose Print in the application menu.

2. Access the Main pane.

3. Select the O Print Preview check box.

4. Click M Print.

5. The Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window is displayed.

6. Check the layout and adjust settings in the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window as desired.

7. Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview menu.

Note

??? For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, refer to Preview.

Mac OS X Software 459

Printer Driver

Using Favorites (Mac OS X)

You can use the Presets function in Mac OS X for favorite-based printing.

Note

???In the printing dialog box, click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings. This is a standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.

Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Mac OS X)

1. In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing

conditions.

Note

???This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of pages, number of copies, and so on.

2.Select the printer in the Printer list.

3. Click Print to start printing.

As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete settings for various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on.

460 Mac OS X Software

Printer Driver

Main Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Main pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Note

???On the Main pane, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the print target, or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.

Common Items

A Media Type

Select the paper type.

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

B Get Information

Displays Paper Information on Printer. You can update the printer driver settings for the feed source, media type, and roll width by selecting the feed source.

??? Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Mac OS X) (???P.464)

C Set

Displays Paper Detailed Settings. You can con???gure the printing settings to match the type of media, such as the ink drying time.

??? Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X) (???P.465)

O Print Preview

If you turn this on, imagePROGRAF Preview starts before printing.

This allows you to check on-screen previews of documents before printing.

Important

???This cannot be selected if Free Layout is enabled in the Page Setup panel.

???Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing (???P.313)

L Printer

Displays Printer. You can display printer information such as the remaining ink levels.

Mac OS X Software 461

Printer Driver

Con???guration using Easy Settings

E Print Target

Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.

???Printing Photos and Images (???P.152)

???Printing Line Drawings and Text (???P.160)

???Printing Of???ce Documents (???P.171)

F Print Quality

Choose the level of print quality.

G View set.

Click to display the View settings dialog box, which enables you to con???rm the settings for the selected item from the E Print Target list or change the order of items listed in E Print Target.

462 Mac OS X Software

Printer Driver

Con???guration using Advanced Settings

E Print Priority

Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.

??? Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing (???P.187)

F Print Quality

Choose the level of print quality.

??? Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing (???P.187)

H Color Mode

Choose the color mode.

??? Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing (???P.187)

I Set

Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings.

??? Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (???P.177)

J Unidirectional Printing

Select this checkbox to prevent problems such as misaligned lines and improve the print quality. However, the printing speed becomes slower.

Q Thicken Fine Lines

Activate this option to print ???ne lines more distinctly.

P Sharpen Text

Activate this option to print text more sharply.

K Reduce Print Unevenness

Select this checkbox for two-pass printing to reduce color shading.

This option is displayed if you have selected Plain Paper in Media Type and Of???ce Document in Print Priority.

N Economy Printing

Select this checkbox to reduce the amount of ink consumed during printing. However, the print quality is worse than for normal printing.

Select this mode if you want to conserve ink when checking drawings, for example. Depending on the Media Type and Print Quality settings, this mode may not be available.

Mac OS X Software 463

Printer Driver

Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Mac OS X)

On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and con???gure printer driver media type setting.

Note

???To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main pane, click Get Information by Media Type. (???P.461)

A Paper Source

Shows the Paper Source supported by the printer, as well as the type of paper loaded. To update the media type setting in the printer driver, select the desired Paper Source option and click OK.

464 Mac OS X Software

Printer Driver

Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X)

The Paper Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

Note

???To display the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main pane, click Set by Media Type. (???P.461)

A Media Type

Select the paper type.

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

B Drying Time

Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying Time setting is only valid for rolls.

??? (???P.127)

C Between Pages

Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the paper, as needed.

D Between Scans

Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until printing the next line, as needed.

E Roll Paper Margin for Safety

You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held ???rmly against the Platen.

F Near End Margin

Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the roll, as needed.

G Cut Speed

Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.

H Automatic Cutting

You can activate or deactivate automatic cutting and printing of cut lines, as desired. In this list, specify

Printer Default, None, or Print Cut Guideline.

Mac OS X Software 465

Printer Driver

J Mirror

Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.

View settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Mac OS X)

In the View settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.

Note

???To display the View settings dialog box, on the Main pane, click View settings by Print Target. (???P.461)

A Print Target

Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).

B Name

Identi???es the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.

C Details

Here, you can con???rm detailed settings values for each item selected in the Print Target list.

466 Mac OS X Software

Printer Driver

Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X)

In general, make any needed adjustments to the color of documents in the application used to create them. However, if the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can also adjust the color in the printer driver.

Color Adjustment pane: color

If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment pane.

Note

???To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main pane click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings. (???P.461)

A Sample Type

Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or Graphics.

B View Color Pattern

Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.

C Apply to Sample

Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.

D Cyan / E Magenta / F Yellow

Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.

G Gray Tone

Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool (tinged with blue) or Warm (tinged with red).

H Brightness

Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen).

I Contrast

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing the Contrast softens images.

Mac OS X Software 467

Printer Driver

J Saturation

Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Saturation makes colors more subdued.

Note

??? For details on settings items,see ???Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver???. (???P.177)

K Object Adjustment

Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.

Matching pane

On the Matching pane, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices.

Note

???To display the Matching pane, on the Main pane click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click Matching. (???P.461)

A Matching Mode

Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.

B Matching Method

Select the matching method that suits the document to be printed. Various Matching Method options are available depending on your selection in Matching Mode.

Note

??? For details on settings items,see ???Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver???. (???P.177)

468 Mac OS X Software

Printer Driver

Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Color Settings pane for monochrome printing.

Color Adjustment pane: Monochrome

On the Color Adjustment pane for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.

Note

???To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main pane, click Color Settings in Advanced Settings. (???P.461)

A Sample Type

Choose a sample image from Standard, Portrait, Landscape, or Graphics.

B View Color Pattern

Select this checkbox to display the color pattern.

C Apply to Sample

Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image.

D Cyan / E Magenta / F Yellow

Not available.

G Gray Tone

Not available.

H Brightness

Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen).

I Contrast

Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other, as desired. Increasing the I Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing the I Contrast softens images.

Mac OS X Software 469

Printer Driver

J Saturation

Not available.

Note

??? For details on settings items,see ???Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver???. (???P.177)

K Object Adjustment

Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.

470 Mac OS X Software

Printer Driver

Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Page Setup pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer driver help.

A Paper Source

Choose how paper is supplied.

Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in A Media Type in the Main pane.

B Roll Width

Displays the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer. Unknown is displayed if the printer cannot detect the roll paper width.

C Page Size

Displays the size of the original, as speci???ed in the page settings of the application.

For details on page sizes available in the application.see ???Paper Sizes???. (???P.100)

D Enlarged/Reduced Printing

Select this checkbox to choose the following options.

???Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (???P.201)

???Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (???P.207)

???Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (???P.213)

E Fit Paper Size

Resizes the document image to match the paper size.

F Fit Roll Paper Width

Resizes the document image to match the roll width.

G Scaling

Resizes the document image based on a speci???ed scaling value. Enter a value in a range of ???5-600.???

H Borderless Printing

Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper is selected in the A Paper Source list.

Activate this setting for borderless printing to match the size and width of the paper.

???Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (???P.232)

???Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (???P.239)

???Borderless Printing at Actual Size (???P.225)

Mac OS X Software 471

Printer Driver

I Paper Size

Choose the size of the paper you will print on.

Click Display all selections for Paper Size to list available sizes.

For details on available paper sizes,see ???Paper Sizes???. (???P.100)

J Print Centered

Select this checkbox to print document images in the center of the paper.

???Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (???P.289)

???Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (???P.295)

K No Spaces at Top or Bottom

Select this checkbox to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve the paper.

??? Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (???P.307)

L Rotate Page 90 degrees

Select this checkbox to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before printing.

??? Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (???P.301)

N Free Layout

Select this checkbox to start imagePROGRAF Free Layout before printing.

This allows you to print multiple documents next to each other.

Important

???This cannot be selected if Print Preview is enabled in the Main panel.

???Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (???P.269)

472 Mac OS X Software

Printer Driver

Utility Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Utility pane.

A Set

Click to display the Printer dialog box, which offers the following maintenance for the printer.

???Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning

???Head alignment adjustment

???Feed amount adjustment

B View

Click to start imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, which enables you to view the status of print jobs.

C Set

Click to complete the settings for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy). *1: For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

Mac OS X Software 473

Printer Driver

Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X)

The following settings are available on the Additional Settings pane.

A Data Send Method

Choose how print data is sent to the printer.

???B Send Print Data Immediately to Printer

???C Send All Print Data as Batch to Printer

474 Mac OS X Software

Printer Driver

Support Pane (Mac OS X)

On the Support pane, you can view support information and the user???s manual.

A Support Information

Click to access the Canon support webpage, where you can ???nd the latest information on the printer and consumables, check for printer driver updates, and browse other information.

B User Manual

Click to view the printer user???s manual. This function requires the user???s manual to be installed on your computer.

C Settings

The settings can be saved as a ???le. Click to display the Export dialog box, which enables you to specify where to save the ???le.

D About

You can display version information for the printer driver.

Mac OS X Software 475

Preview

Preview

The Features of Preview

The main features of Preview are as follows.

???While viewing this screen, you can adjust layout settings of a document created with application software.

???You can not only adjust layout settings but also your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen, and you can print the preview screen as it is seen.

Note

???The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Preview settings.

Operating Environment

You can use the Preview in the following environments.

???Compatible Operating System Mac OS X (10.3.9 to 10.5)

???Software that requires installation imagePROGRAF Printer Driver

476 Mac OS X Software

Preview

Starting Preview

Follow the procedure below to start the Preview.

1. Start the apllication software which you use.

2. From the application software???s ???File??? menu, select the printer setup menu to open the ???Print??? dialog box.

Note

???Normally, select ???Print??? from the ???File??? menu.

3.Click ???Print Preview??? in the ???Main??? panel to attach a checkmark.

4.Click the ???Print??? button in the ???Print??? dialog box.

5. Preview main window is displayed.

Mac OS X Software 477

Preview

Preview Main Window

The Preview main window consists of the menu and tool bars, and preview, dialog , drawer and status area.

Note

??? You can use the ???View??? menu to show or hide the tool bar.

Menu Bar

This allows you to select menus required for operations.

Tool Bar

This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.

Preview Area

You can check the settings you made in this area.

478 Mac OS X Software

Preview

Dialog Area

This allows you to set the print conditions and perform a print job.

Drawer Area

This allows you to display the thumbnails of a document.

This area appears when you click ???Drawer??? from the tool bar.

Alternatively, you may select ???Drawer??? from the ???View??? menu.

Status Area

This shows ???Input Size??? and ???Output Size???.

Mac OS X Software 479

Preview

Paper Settings Panel

This panel appears when you select Paper Settings in the dialog area.

???Media Type???

This allows you to select the media type.

Note

???Always select media type that is actually set in the printer. When the media you chose is different from the media set in the printer, you may not receive the desired print results.

???Easy Settings??? / ???Advanced Settings???

Two modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs.

The settings available on each mode are as follows.

???Easy Settings (???P.482)

???Advanced Settings (???P.484)

Paper Source

You can select the paper source.

The following settings are available for paper source.

???Roll Paper Width???

This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer.

Note

??? Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.

480 Mac OS X Software

Preview

???Copies???

You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters.

Note

???The maximum value is 999.

???You can change the numbers by clicking either ????????? button or ????????? button.

???Restore Defaults??? Button

Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Preview.

???Print??? Button

Click the button to begin printing.

???Update Printer Info.??? Button

Click the button to acquire printer information.

Mac OS X Software 481

Preview

Easy Settings

You can easily select the best settings for the print job by just selecting an item from the print target list that matches the content of the document.

???Print Target???

You can easily select the best settings for the print job simply.

If you select each ???Print Target??? item the corresponding comment for that item is displayed below the list.

Note

??? The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.

482 Mac OS X Software

Preview

???Print Quality???

Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed. The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.

Note

???The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.

???Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft, however, print quality is higher.

???Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Draft than with High, however, print quality is lower.

Mac OS X Software 483

Preview

Advanced Settings

Presents detailed settings for the print quality, the color mode, and other items so you can select the values for these settings yourself.

???Print Priority???

Select a print quality mode that is appropriate for the print job.

Note

??? The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.

???Print Quality???

Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed. The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.

Note

???The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.

???Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft, however, print quality is higher.

???Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Draft than with High, however, print quality is lower.

484 Mac OS X Software

Preview

Output Settings Panel

This panel appears when you select Output Settings in the dialog area.

???Enlarged/Reduced Printing???

Select the method for enlarged/reduced printing.

The following settings are available for enlarged/reduced printing.

???Borderless Printing???

You can print the media without margins on all sides when the roll paper with the speci???c width and the speci???c media type is used.

For more information about ???Borderless Printing???, see ???Print with No Borders???. (???P.496)

Note

???Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.

???This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in ???Print Centered???.

Mac OS X Software 485

Preview

Paper Size

You can select the size of the print media.

Note

??? This is not displayed when ???Fit Roll Paper Width??? is set in ???Enlarged/Reduced Printing???.

???Print Centered???

You can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer.

For more information about ???Print Centered???, see ???Print on the Center???. (???P.497)

Note

??? This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in ???Borderless Printing???.

???No Spaces at Top or Bottom???

You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or bottom.

For more information about ???No Spaces at Top or Bottom???, see ???Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom???. (???P.498)

Note

??? Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.

???Rotate Page???

Select the method for rotating page.

The following settings are available for rotating page.

???Restore Defaults??? Button

Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Preview.

???Print??? Button

Click the button to begin printing.

???Update Printer Info.??? Button

Click the button to acquire printer information.

486 Mac OS X Software

Preview

Color Settings Panel

This panel appears when you select Color Settings in the dialog area.

???Color Mode???

You can select a color mode to suit the print job.

Note

??? The availability of settings depends on the print priority and media type selections.

???Color Adjustment??? / ???Matching???

You can set the color adjustment and matching.

???Color Adjustment (???P.488)

???Matching (???P.490)

???Restore Defaults??? Button

Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Preview.

???Print??? Button

Click the button to begin printing.

???Update Printer Info.??? Button

Click the button to acquire printer information.

Mac OS X Software 487

Preview

Color Adjustment

You can set the color adjustment.

Adjusting Color

Normally colors should be adjusted in the software application, but if you see colors in the printout that do not match colors on the screen, you can perform color adjustments.

1. Select ???Color??? on ???Color Mode??? in the Color Settings panel.

2. Select ???Color Adjustment???.

3. Drag each slider to the left or right to adjust.

Note

???You can also click the up or down arrow, or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value.

488 Mac OS X Software

Preview

Adjusting Monochrome

Use the monochrome setting to print monochrome images of color photographs captured with a scanner or digital camera or other color images.

1. Select ???Monochrome??? on ???Color Mode??? in the Color Settings panel.

2. Select ???Color Adjustment???.

3. Drag each slider to the left or right to adjust.

Note

???You can also click the up or down arrow, or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value.

Mac OS X Software 489

Preview

Matching

You can set the matching.

???Matching Mode???

You can select a matching mode to suit the print job.

Note

??? You need to set each correction on the printer driver.

???Matching Method???

You can select a matching method to suit the print job.

???Input Pro???le???

Select the input pro???le.

Note

??? You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in ???Matching Mode???.

???Printer Pro???le???

Select the printer pro???le.

Note

??? You can select only after ICC Matching Mode or ???ColorSync??? has been selected in ???Mode???.

490 Mac OS X Software

Preview

???Soft Proof???

When you place a checkmark here, ???ColorSync??? applies to the preview area.

Note

??? You can select only after ???ColorSync??? has been selected in ???Matching Mode???.

Mac OS X Software 491

Preview

Driver Matching Mode

1. Under ???Mode???, select Driver Matching Mode.

2. Click ???Matching Method??? list, and then select a setting.

492 Mac OS X Software

Click the ???Printer Pro???le??? list and select a printer pro???le.

Preview

ICC Matching Mode

1. Under ???Matching Mode??? on the ???Matching???, select ICC Matching Mode.

2. Click the ???Matching Method??? list, and then select a setting.

3. Click the ???Input Pro???le??? list and select an input pro???le.

4.

Mac OS X Software 493

Preview

ColorSync

1. Place a checkmark on ???Soft Proof??? to simulate the output product in Layout Area.

494 Mac OS X Software

Preview

Preferences Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select ???Preferences??? from the ???imagePROGRAF Advanced Preview??? menu. You can set the preferences for Preview.

???Units???

Set the unit for paper length, margins, and so on.

Zoom Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select ???Zoom??? from the ???View??? menu. You can enlarge or reduce the screen display.

Scaling

Set the magni???cation for enlargement or reduction of the screen display.

Note

???You can input between 10 and 400.

???You can change the numbers by clicking ????????? button.

Go to Page Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select ???Go to Page??? from the ???View??? menu.

Note

??? You can not select ???Go to Page??? if the document is only one page.

???Page???

Input the page number in numerical characters to display in the preview area.

Note

??? You can change the numbers in the range of the page of the documents.

Mac OS X Software 495

Preview

Print with No Borders

You can use the borderless printing function to print without margins surrounding the image.

Note

???With some media borderless printing can be performed only between two edges.

???To use the borderless printing function, the speci???ed media must be set to the printer.

1.On the Paper Settings Panel (???P.480) , select ???Roll Paper??? in Paper Source.

2.On the Output Settings panel, click the ???Enlarged/Reduced Printing??? check box on.

3.Select ???Fit Roll Paper Width???.

4.Click the ???Borderless Printing??? check box on.

5. Click the ???Print??? button.

Borderless printing begins.

496 Mac OS X Software

Preview

Print on the Center

You can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer.

Note

??? This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in ???Borderless Printing???.

1.On the Output Settings panel, click the ???Print Centered??? check box on.

2. Click the ???Print??? button. Printing on the center begins.

Mac OS X Software 497

Preview

Not Print Spaces at the Top/Bottom

You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or bottom.

Note

??? This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in ???Borderless Printing???.

1.On the Paper Settings Panel (???P.480) , select ???Roll Paper??? in Paper Source.

2.On the Output Settings panel, click the ???No Spaces at Top or Bottom??? check box on.

3. Click the ???Print??? button.

Printing on the settings with no spaces at top or bottom begins.

498 Mac OS X Software

Preview

Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees

You can save paper by printing in landscape orientation on roll paper.

1. On the Paper Settings Panel (???P.480) , select ???Roll Paper??? in Paper Source.

2. On the Output Settings panel, click the ???Rotate Page??? check box on.

3. Select ???Rotate Right 90 Degrees??? or ???Rotate Left 90 Degrees???.

4. Click the ???Print??? button.

Printing on rotating 90 degrees begins.

Mac OS X Software 499

Preview

Display with Fitting to the Width of the Paper

In the preview area, you can display to the width of the paper.

1. Select ???Fit to Width??? from the tool bar.

2. Fitting to the width of the paper, it is displayed.

500 Mac OS X Software

Preview

Display with All

In the preview area, you can display all.

1. Select ???Fit Screen??? from the tool bar.

2. All is displayed.

Mac OS X Software 501

Preview

Display with Actual Size

In the preview area, you can display the actual size.

1. Select ???Actual Size??? from the tool bar.

2. Actual size is displayed.

502 Mac OS X Software

Preview

Moving a Page

You can move a page to display in the preview area.

1. Select each button in ???Go to Page??? on the tool bar.

Go to the ???rst page.

Go to the previous page.

Go to the next page.

Go to the last page.

2. The target page appears.

Note

??? You can also move a page by clicking the page on the thumbnails.

Mac OS X Software 503

Free Layout

Free Layout

The Features of Free Layout

The main features of Free Layout are as follows.

???Allows you to lay out at will and print a document created with application software.

???You can not only lay out multiple pages on one page but also lay out and print a multiple-???le document on one page, or lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.

Note

???The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Free Layout settings.

Operating Environment

You can use the Free Layout in the following environments.

???Compatible Operating System Mac OS X (10.3.9 to 10.5)

???Software that requires installation imagePROGRAF Printer Driver

504 Mac OS X Software

Free Layout

Starting Free Layout

Follow the procedure below to start the Free Layout.

1. Start the apllication software which you use.

2. From the application software???s ???File??? menu, select the printer setup menu to open the ???Print??? dialog box.

Note

???Normally, select ???Print??? from the ???File??? menu.

3.Click on ???Free Layout??? in the ???Page Setup??? panel to attach a checkmark.

4.Click the ???Print??? button in the ???Print??? dialog box.

5. Free Layout main window is displayed.

Mac OS X Software 505

Free Layout

Free Layout Main Window

The Free Layout main window consists of the menu and tool bars, layout area and dialog areas.

Note

??? You can use the ???View??? menu to show or hide the tool.

Menu Bar

This allows you to select menus required for operations.

Tool Bar

This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations.

Layout Area

This allows you to lay out objects and edit the object size and orientation.

506 Mac OS X Software

Free Layout

Dialog Area

This allows you to set the print conditions and perform a print job.

Mac OS X Software 507

Free Layout

Paper Settings Panel

This panel appears when you select Paper Settings in the dialog area.

???Media Type???

This allows you to select the media type.

Note

???Always select media type that is actually set in the printer. When the media you chose is different from the media set in the printer, you may not receive the desired print results.

???Easy Settings??? / ???Advanced Settings???

Two modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs.

The settings available on each mode are as follows.

???Easy Settings (???P.510)

???Advanced Settings (???P.512)

Paper Source

You can select the paper source.

The following settings are available for paper source.

???Roll Paper Width???

This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer.

Note

??? Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.

508 Mac OS X Software

Free Layout

???Copies???

You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters.

Note

???The maximum value is 999.

???You can change the numbers by clicking either ????????? button or ????????? button.

???Restore Defaults??? Button

Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Free Layout.

???Print??? Button

Click the button to begin printing.

???Update Printer Info.??? Button

Click the button to acquire printer information.

Mac OS X Software 509

Free Layout

Easy Settings

You can easily select the best settings for the print job by just selecting an item from the print target list that matches the content of the document.

???Print Target???

You can easily select the best settings for the print job simply.

If you select each ???Print Target??? item the corresponding comment for that item is displayed below the list.

Note

??? The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.

510 Mac OS X Software

Free Layout

???Print Quality???

Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed. The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.

Note

???The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.

???Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft, however, print quality is higher.

???Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Draft than with High, however, print quality is lower.

Mac OS X Software 511

Free Layout

Advanced Settings

Presents detailed settings for the print priority, the print quality, and other items so you can select the values for these settings yourself.

???Print Priority???

Select a print quality mode that is appropriate for the print job.

Note

??? The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.

???Print Quality???

Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed. The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.

Note

???The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.

???Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft, however, print quality is higher.

???Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Draft than with High, however, print quality is lower.

512 Mac OS X Software

Free Layout

Color Settings Panel

This panel appears when you select Color Settings in the dialog area.

???Color Mode???

You can select a color mode to suit the print job.

Note

??? The availability of settings depends on the print priority and media type selections.

???Color Adjustment??? / ???Matching???

You can set the color adjustment and matching.

???Color Adjustment (???P.514)

???Matching (???P.516)

???Restore Defaults??? Button

Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Free Layout.

???Print??? Button

Click the button to begin printing.

???Update Printer Info.??? Button

Click the button to acquire printer information.

Mac OS X Software 513

Free Layout

Color Adjustment

You can set the color adjustment.

Adjusting Color

Normally colors should be adjusted in the software application, but if you see colors in the printout that do not match colors on the screen, you can perform color adjustments.

1. Select ???Color??? on ???Color Mode??? in the Color Settings panel.

2. Select ???Color Adjustment???.

3. Drag each slider to the left or right to adjust.

Note

???You can also click the up or down arrow, or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value.

514 Mac OS X Software

Free Layout

Adjusting Monochrome

Use the monochrome setting to print monochrome images of color photographs captured with a scanner or digital camera or other color images.

1. Select ???Monochrome??? on ???Color Mode??? in the Color Settings panel.

2. Select ???Color Adjustment???.

3. Drag each slider to the left or right to adjust.

Note

???You can also click the up or down arrow, or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value.

Mac OS X Software 515

Free Layout

Matching

You can set the matching.

???Matching Mode???

You can select a matching mode to suit the print job.

Note

??? You need to set each correction on the printer driver.

???Matching Method???

You can select a matching method to suit the print job.

???Input Pro???le???

Select the input pro???le.

Note

??? You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in ???Matching Mode???.

???Printer Pro???le???

Select the printer pro???le.

Note

??? You can select only after ICC Matching Mode or ???ColorSync??? has been selected in ???Mode???.

516 Mac OS X Software

Free Layout

???Soft Proof???

When you place a checkmark here, ???ColorSync??? applies to the layout area.

Note

??? You can select only after ???ColorSync??? has been selected in ???Matching Mode???.

Mac OS X Software 517

Free Layout

Driver Matching Mode

1. Under ???Matching Mode???, select Driver Matching Mode.

2. Click the ???Matching Method??? list, and then select a setting.

518 Mac OS X Software

Click the ???Printer Pro???le??? list and select a printer pro???le.

Free Layout

ICC Matching Mode

1. Under ???Matching Mode???, select ICC Matching Mode.

2. Click the ???Matching Method??? list, and then select a setting.

3. Click the ???Input Pro???le??? list and select an input pro???le.

4.

Mac OS X Software 519

Free Layout

ColorSync

1. Check that ???ColorSync??? is selected in ???Matching Mode???.

2. Place a checkmark on ???Soft Proof??? to simulate the output product in Layout Area.

520 Mac OS X Software

Free Layout

Preferences Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select ???Preferences??? from the ???imagePROGRAF Advanced Preview??? menu. You can set the preferences for Free Layout.

???Units???

Set the unit for paper length, margins, and so on.

???Gridlines???

You can input a grid line width value in numerical characters so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.

Note

???You can input between 10.0 and 200.0(mm) (between 0.39 and 7.87(inch)).

???You can change the numbers by clicking either ????????? button or ????????? button.

???Divisions???

You can change the number of divisions of grid lines so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects.

Note

???You can input between 1 and 10.

???You can change the numbers by clicking either ????????? button or ????????? button.

???Grid Color???

Select the grid line color.

???Print Object Frames???

You can print the object border.

Note

??? If you do not want to print the object border, deselect the ???Print Object Frames??? check box.

???Object Frame Style???

You can select the object frame style for printing.

The following settings are available for the object frame style.

Mac OS X Software 521

Free Layout

Auto Arrange Spacing

Change the object-to-object spacing to be applied in the operation of laying out objects automatically.

Note

???You can input between 0.0 and 100.0(mm) (between 0.00 and 3.94(inch)).

???You can change the numbers by clicking either ????????? button or ????????? button.

522 Mac OS X Software

Free Layout

Page Setup Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select ???Page Setup??? from the ???File??? menu.This dialog box provides selections for setting the media size, orientation and other important features.

???Paper Orientation???

This selects the paper orientation.

The following settings are available for orientation.

???Roll Paper Length???

Set the length of one page to print on roll paper.

When you place a checkmark on ???Auto Settings???, the one-page length to be printed on roll paper is automatically set so that the laid-out objects are printed on one page.

Note

???Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.

???You can input between 203.2 and 18000.0(mm) (between 8.00 and 708.66(inch)).

???You can change the numbers by clicking either ????????? button or ????????? button.

???Order???

Set the object layout order.

The following settings are available for order.

Note

???When you have selected ???Roll Paper Length??? > ???Auto Settings??? and ???Paper Orientation??? > ???Vertical???, you can choose only ???Upper Left to Right???.

???When you have selected ???Roll Paper Length??? > ???Auto Settings??? and ???Paper Orientation??? > ???Horizontal???, you can choose only ???Upper Left to Bottom???.

Mac OS X Software 523

Free Layout

Paper Size

You can select the size of the print media.

Note

??? You cannot display this if ???Roll Paper??? is selected in Paper Source.

Zoom Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select ???Zoom??? from the ???View??? menu. You can enlarge or reduce the screen display.

Scaling

Set the magni???cation for enlargement or reduction of the screen display.

Note

???You can input between 10 and 400.

???You can change the numbers by clicking ????????? button.

524 Mac OS X Software

Free Layout

Format Dialog Box

This dialog box appears when you select ???Format??? from the ???Object??? menu after you select an object. You can rotate, enlarge, or reduce an object.

Note

??? When the objects are not selected, you can not select ???Format???.

???Rotate???

When you place a checkmark here, you can select ???Rotate Right??? or ???Rotate Left???.

Note

??? When several objects are selected, you cannot select ???Rotate???.

Scaling

You can input the value for enlargement or reduction of the obeject in numerical characters.

Note

???You can input between 25 and 400.

???You can change the numbers by clicking either ????????? button or ????????? button.

???Object Size???

You can con???rm the object size.

Note

??? When several objects are selected, you cannot display ???Object Size???.

Mac OS X Software 525

Free Layout

Laying out a Multiple-File Document on One Page

You can lay out and print a multiple-???le document on one page.

1. From the application software???s ???File??? menu, select the printer setup menu to open the ???Print??? dialog box.

Note

???Normally, select ???Print??? from the ???File??? menu.

2.Click on ???Free Layout??? in the ???Page Setup??? panel to attach a checkmark.

3.In the ???Print??? dialog box, select the pages to print and the number of copies, and click the ???Print??? button.

Free Layout starts, laying out the document created with application software in the layout area as an object.

4.Leaving Free Layout running, open other ???les with the application software and repeat the above steps.

Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page

You can lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page.

1. From the application software???s ???File??? menu, select the printer setup menu to open the ???Print??? dialog box.

Note

???Normally, select ???Print??? from the ???File??? menu.

2.Click on ???Free Layout??? in the ???Page Setup??? panel to attach a checkmark.

3.In the ???Print??? dialog box, select the pages to print and the number of copies, and click the ???Print??? button.

Free Layout starts, laying out the document created with application software in the layout area as an object.

4.Leaving Free Layout running, open the ???les with other application software and repeat the above steps.

526 Mac OS X Software

Free Layout

Selecting an Object

When an object is selected, a select box (blue border) appears around the object.

Note

???To select an object, click that object.

???To select multiple successive objects, click them while holding down the shift key.

???To select multiple arbitrary objects, click them while holding down the command key.

???To select all objects, select ???Select All??? from the ???Edit??? menu.

Mac OS X Software 527

Free Layout

Changing the Object Size

You can change the object size by means of mouse operation or by specifying a scaling value.

Note

??? The vertical-to-horizontal ratio remains unchanged when the object is enlarged or reduced.

Resizing by means of mouse operation

1. Select an object.

2. Place the pointer at a corner of the selection box around the object to show the arrow handle, and drag this handle to change the object size.

Resizing by specifying a scaling value

1. Select an object.

2. Open the Format Dialog Box. (???P.525)

3. Use Scaling to set the magni???cation for enlargement or reduction. You either enter numbers directly.

Note

???You can input between 25 and 400.

???You can change the numbers by clicking either ????????? button or ????????? button.

4.Click the ???OK??? button.

528 Mac OS X Software

Free Layout

Moving an Object

You can move the object position.

1. Select an object.

2. Place the pointer inside the selection box of the object to show the crosshair handle, and drag it to move the object.

Rotating an Object

You can rotate the object.

1. Select an object.

2. Select ???Rotate Left??? or ???Rotate Right??? from the toolbar.

Alternatively, you may click on the ???Rotate??? check box in the Format Dialog Box (???P.525) then select ???Rotate Right??? or ???Rotate Left???, and click the ???OK??? button.

Note

??? When several objects are selected, you cannot select ???Rotate???.

Mac OS X Software 529

Free Layout

Laying out Objects Automatically

Click ???Auto Arrange??? in the tool bar. This automatically lays out objects. Alternatively, you may select ???Auto Arrange Object??? from the ???Object??? menu.

Note

??? The object layout order varies depending on the ???Order??? setting on the Page Setup Dialog Box. (???P.523)

530 Mac OS X Software

Free Layout

Aligning Objects

You can align objects systematically.

1.

2.

Select multiple objects.

Select the align menu from the ???Object??? menu.

???Align Top???

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the top.

???Center Vertically???

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the vertical center.

???Align Bottom???

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the bottom.

Mac OS X Software 531

Free Layout

???Align Left???

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the left.

???Center Horizontally???

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the horizontal center.

???Align Right???

Lays out the objects, justifying them to the right.

532 Mac OS X Software

Free Layout

Changing the Object Overlapping Order

You can change the object overlapping order.

1.

2.

Select an object.

Select the overlapping order menu from the ???Object??? menu.

???Bring to Front???

Moves the object to the frontmost position.

???Send to Back???

Moves the object to the backmost position.

Mac OS X Software 533

Free Layout

???Bring Forward???

Moves the object one position to the front.

???Send Backward???

Moves the object one position to the back.

534 Mac OS X Software

Free Layout

Pasting a Copied or Cut Object

1. Click ???Copy??? or ???Cut??? from the toolbar.

Alternatively, you may select ???Copy??? or ???Cut??? from the ???Edit??? menu.

2. Click ???Paste??? from the toolbar.

Alternatively, you may select ???Paste??? from the ???Edit??? menu.

Note

??? The copied or cut object is laid out at the end of the page.

Mac OS X Software 535

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

The main features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy are as follows.

???Allows the document scanned with the Color imageRUNNER to be automatically enlarged and printed.

???You can perform basic printer settings such as printer selection, media type and output pro???le selection, and matching methods, in addition to borderless printing and enlargement/reduction process without growing through the printer driver.

Note

???The media type, image size, detailed media settings, and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy settings.

Operating Environment

You can use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy in the following environments.

???Compatible Operating System Mac OS X (10.3.9 to 10.5)

???Software that requires installation imagePROGRAF Printer Driver

536 Mac OS X Software

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Follow the procedure below to start the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

1. Open the ???Utility??? panel of the ???Print??? dialog box.

Note

???Your printer is depicted in the lower-left area of this screen.

2.Click the ???Set??? button in ???Con???gure Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? to open the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box.

Note

???If you click on the ???Monitor Hot Folder Constantly??? check box in the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box, the icon of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility will appear on the Dock when starting OS X thereafter.

???You can also start the utility directly by clicking on the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.app??? icon in ???Applications??? > ???Canon Utilities??? > ???iR Enlargement Copy???.

Mac OS X Software 537

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box

The explanation below is on the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box.

Note

???For the step to open the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box, see ???Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy???. (???P.537)

???Delete ???les in the folder???

From the Hot Folder list, select a hot folder and click the ???Delete??? button to delete only ???les in the hot folder.

???Delete the entire folders, as well as items in the list above???

From the Hot Folder list, select a hot folder and click the ???Delete??? button to delete the hot folder.

???Delete??? Button

Select ???Delete ???les in the folder??? or ???Delete the entire folders, as well as items in the list above??? and click this button to delete the hot folder or only ???les in the hot folder.

???Add??? Button

Click the button to open the ???Destination Selection??? dialog box so that you can add a hot folder.

???Edit??? Button

From the Hot Folder list, select a hot folder and click this button to open the ???Add/Edit Hot Folder??? dialog box that allows you to edit the hot folder.

???Monitor Hot Folder Constantly???

If you click on the check box, the icon of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility will appear on the Dock when starting OS X thereafter.

538 Mac OS X Software

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Hot Folder

Hot folder refers to a folder used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

???When transferred to the PC???s hot folder, the document data scanned with the Color imageRUNNER is printed in enlarged size from the printer according to the print conditions set in the hot folder.

???You can create a new hot folder, edit or delete an existing one, and set print conditions at will.

Note

??? You can create up to 10 hot folders.

Creating a New Hot Folder

1. Open the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box.

Note

???For the step to open the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box, see ???Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy???. (???P.537)

2.Click the ???Add??? button in ???Enlarged Copy Settings??? to open the ???Destination Selection??? dialog box.

3.From the printer list in ???Destination???, select the printer of destination.

Mac OS X Software 539

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

4. Click the ???OK??? button to open the ???Add/Edit Hot Folder??? dialog box.

5. In ???Name???, enter the name to display in the Hot Folder list.

6. In ???Hot Folder???, enter the Hot Folder name.

7. Click the ???OK??? button. The created Hot Folder is listed in the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box.

8. Click the ???Close??? button to close the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box.

9. From the ???Apple??? Menu, open the ???Sharing??? dialog box for ???System Preferences???.

10. Select the check box labeled ???File Sharing???, and click the ???Options??? button.

11. Select the check box labeled ???Share ???les and folders using FTP??? and ???Share ???les and folders using SMB??? to make shared settings.

Note

??? You can create up to 10 hot folders.

540 Mac OS X Software

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Editing a Hot Folder (Setting Print Conditions)

1. Open the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box.

2. Select the Hot Folder from the Hot Folder list.

3. From ???Enlarged Copy Settings???, click ???Edit??? button to open the ???Add/Edit Hot Folder??? dialog box.

4. Make the necessary settings in the Paper Settings Panel. (???P.544)

Mac OS X Software 541

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

5. Make the necessary settings in the Output Settings Panel. (???P.549)

6. Make the necessary settings in the Color Settings Panel. (???P.551)

7. Click the ???OK??? button to close the ???Add/Edit Hot Folder??? dialog box.

8. From the ???Apple??? Menu, open the ???Sharing??? dialog box for ???System Preferences???.

9. Select the check box labeled ???File Sharing???, and click the ???Options??? button.

10. Select the check box labeled ???Share ???les and folders using FTP??? and ???Share ???les and folders using SMB??? to make shared settings.

Note

???If you???ve made shared settings when you created a new Hot Folder, you do not need to execute steps 8 to 10.

542 Mac OS X Software

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Deleting a Hot Folder

1. Open the ???Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy??? dialog box.

2. Select the Hot Folder you want to delete from the Hot Folder list.

3. Select ???Delete the entire folders, as well as items in the list above???, and then click the ???Delete??? button.

4. Read the messag,e and then click the ???OK??? button.

Note

??? Select ???Delete ???les in the folder??? to delete only ???les in the hot folder.

Mac OS X Software 543

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Setting the Print Parameters

You can set the print conditions in the setting panels within the ???Add/Edit Hot Folder??? dialog box.

The settings available on each panel are as follows.

???Paper Settings Panel (???P.544)

???Output Settings Panel (???P.549)

???Color Settings Panel (???P.551)

Paper Settings Panel

???Easy Settings??? / ???Advanced Settings???

Two modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs.

The settings available on each mode are as follows.

???Easy Settings (???P.546)

???Advanced Settings (???P.548)

???Media Type???

This allows you to select the media type.

Note

???Always select media type that is actually set in the printer. When the media you chose is different from the media set in the printer, you may not receive the desired print results.

Paper Source

You can select the paper source.

The following settings are available for paper source.

544 Mac OS X Software

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

???Roll Paper Width???

This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer.

Note

??? Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.

Automatic Cutting

You can set the printer to cut roll paper automatically or print a guideline for cutting.

The following settings are available for automatic cutting.

Note

??? Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.

???Copies???

You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters.

Note

???The maximum value is 999.

???You can change the numbers by clicking either ????????? button or ????????? button.

Mac OS X Software 545

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Easy Settings

You can easily select the best settings for the print job by just selecting an item from the print target list that matches the content of the document.

???Print Target???

You can easily select the best settings for the print job simply.

If you select each ???Print Target??? item the corresponding comment for that item is displayed below the list.

Note

??? The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.

546 Mac OS X Software

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

???Print Quality???

Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed. The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.

Note

???The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.

???Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft, however, print quality is higher.

???Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Draft than with High, however, print quality is lower.

Mac OS X Software 547

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Advanced Settings

Presents detailed settings for the print priority, the print quality, and other items so you can select the values for these settings yourself.

???Print Priority???

Select a print quality mode that is appropriate for the print job.

Note

??? The number of settings available for selection depends on the media type.

???Print Quality???

Selecting print quality strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed. The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations.

Note

???The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections.

???Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft, however, print quality is higher.

???Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Draft than with High, however, print quality is lower.

548 Mac OS X Software

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Output Settings Panel

???Enlarged/Reduced Printing???

Select the method for enlarged/reduced printing.

The following settings are available for enlarged/reduced printing.

???Borderless Printing???

You can print the media without margins on all sides when the roll paper with the speci???c width and the speci???c media type is used.

Note

??? Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.

Paper Size

You can select the size of the print media.

Note

??? This is not displayed when ???Fit Roll Paper Width??? is set in ???Enlarged/Reduced Printing???.

Mac OS X Software 549

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

???Print Centered???

Select this feature to print the image in the center of a cut sheet or to print left and right margins evenly from the edges of roll paper.

Note

???This feature is useful when you print the document enlarged or reduced with Scaling as well. When an image is scaled, it is always enlarged or reduced in reference to a starting point in the upper left corner of the page. If the image is reduced, the bottom and right margins are enlarged and the top and left margins remain unchanged. At that point, you can set all margins evenly with this feature.

???No Spaces at Top or Bottom???

You can set the printer to print without any empty area when the print data contains empty area at the top or bottom. Since the printer does not feed paper over the empty area, you can save paper.

Note

??? Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.

???Rotate Page???

Select the method for rotating page.

The following settings are available for rotating page.

Note

??? Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source.

???Output Method??? Button

Click the button to open the ???Output Method??? dialog box.

In this dialog box, you can specify the object output method.

Note

??? To print after saving jobs in the temporary storage space, select ???Save data before printing???.

550 Mac OS X Software

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Color Settings Panel

???Color Mode???

You can select a color mode to suit the print job.

Note

??? The availability of settings depends on the print priority and media type selections.

???Mode???

Under ???Mode???, select the matching mode.

Mac OS X Software 551

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Driver Matching Mode

1. Under ???Mode???, select Driver Matching Mode.

2. Click ???Matching Method??? list, and then select a setting.

552 Mac OS X Software

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

ICC Matching Mode

1. Under ???Mode???, select ICC Matching Mode.

2. Click ???Method??? list, and then select a setting.

3. Click the ???Input Pro???le??? list, and then select an input pro???le.

Note

???To match the color on the printing, select the input pro???le for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy of the Color imageRUNNER type in use.

4.Click the ???Printer Pro???le??? list, and then select a printer pro???le.

Mac OS X Software 553

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

ColorSync

1. Under ???Mode???, select ???ColorSync???.

2. Click the ???Printer Pro???le??? list, and then select a printer pro???le.

Note

??? Available when using Mac OS X 10.3.9-10.4.

554 Mac OS X Software

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X)

Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.

Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.

This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.

To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, ???rst complete these settings in the following order.

1.Register a hot folder on your computer.

Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER and complete the settings for enlargement copy.

2.Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.

Con???gure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.

After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER.

Registering a hot folder on your computer

Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders. Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. You can specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.

1. To display the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box, either double-click the

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.app icon after navigating to Canon Utilities - ???iR Enlargement Copy??? in the Applications folder or click C Set in the Utility pane

2. In Enlarged Copy Settings, click Add or Edit and either create or modify the hot folder. For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help ???le for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

Mac OS X Software 555

Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy

Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.

Con???gure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the Color imageRUNNER.

For instructions on assigning scanning and sending settings to the Favorites button, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.

Scanning the original and print an enlargement

Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer. For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.

1. Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.

2. Press Send to display the screen for transmission.

3. Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.

4. Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all originals, press Done on the touch-panel display.

Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the conditions you speci???ed for the folder.

Note

??? For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.

556 Mac OS X Software

Printmonitor

Printmonitor

The Features of imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

???imagePROGRAF Printmonitor??? is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.

???Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor.

???You can check the status of print jobs, cancel jobs, and manage them as needed.

???If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.

???You can also set up automatic email noti???cation of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you designate in advance.

Note

???If the status of the desired printer is not shown in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, select the printer again as follows.

1.Make sure the printer is on and connected to the network or to a local port.

2.In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer. After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.

3.If information about the printer is not shown in step 2, choose Search Printer in the Printer menu. Printer names listed in the Printer menu are updated with the printers that are now detected.

4.In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer. After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.

Mac OS X Software 557

Printmonitor

Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor

You can use the Driver Panel in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor for operations such as pausing and canceling print jobs.

Preempting Other Jobs

If you select a print job and click the button, the selected job is printed ahead of the job that currently precedes it in the print queue.

Pausing/Resuming Print Jobs

Selecting a print job and clicking the button pauses printing of the selected job.

To resume printing of a paused print job, select the print job and click the button.

Note

???Once all the print data for a print job has been sent to the printer, the job can no longer be paused/resumed.

Canceling Print Jobs

Selecting a print job and clicking the button cancels printing of the selected job.

Note

??? You cannot cancel other users??? print jobs.

558 Mac OS X Software

Printmonitor

Printing Held Jobs

Printing of the job with a ???Status??? of ???Holding??? is paused because the paper speci???ed by the driver does not match the paper currently loaded in the printer.

Use the procedure below to print the held job.

1. Select the held job and click the ???Replace Paper??? button.

2. Replace the paper in the printer with the correct paper.

Note

???To continue printing without changing the paper in the printer, select the held job and click ???Continue to print??? button.

Mac OS X Software 559

Network Setting

Network Setting

Network Setting

Network Environment

System requirements

The system requirements, which vary depending on your network, are as follows.

???Printing over a TCP/IP network (when using IPv4)

???Compatible operating systems

???Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)

???Windows XP (Home Edition or Professional)

???Windows Server 2003 (Standard Edition)

???Windows Vista (Home Basic/Business/Ultimate)

???Windows Server 2008 (Standard Edition or Enterprise Edition)

???Windows XP Professional x64 Edition

???Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition

???Windows Vista x64

???Windows Server 2008 x64

???Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later

???Unix (Solaris 9)

???Unix (Red Hat 9)

???Compatible computer

???A computer that runs one of the above operating systems

???Printing over a TCP/IP network (when using IPv6)

???Compatible operating systems

???Windows Vista (Home Basic/Business/Ultimate)

???Windows Server 2008 (Standard Edition or Enterprise Edition)

???Windows Vista x64

???Windows Server 2008 x64

???Mac OS X 10.3.9 or later

Note

???When using IPv6, you must specify IPv6 on the Control Panel or in RemoteUI. For instructions, see ???Con???guring TCP/IPv6 Network Settings???. (???P.568) or see ???Con???guring the Printer???s TCP/IP Network Settings???. (???P.570)

???The imagePROGRAF printer driver is supported in Mac OS X 10.3.9 or later.

560 Network Setting

Network Setting

???Printing over an AppleTalk network

???Compatible operating systems

???Mac OS X 10.2.8-10.4

???Compatible computer

???A computer that runs one of the above operating systems

Note

???The printer cannot be used over a LocalTalk network.

???Compatible with EtherTalk Phase 2.

???The imagePROGRAF printer driver is not compatible with AppleTalk.

???Printing over a NetWare network

???Compatible servers

???Novell NetWare 4.2/5.1/6.0

???Compatible clients

???Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)

???Windows XP (Professional)

???Compatible computer

???A computer that runs one of the above operating systems

Note

??? In NetWare 6.0, iPrint is not supported.

Network Setting 561

Network Setting

Network Environment

After con???rming what type of network environment you will connect the printer to, set up the printer and computers as needed.

???Example of a Windows network

In Windows networks, print over TCP/IP.

Note

???NetBIOS is not supported.

???Example of a Macintosh network

In Macintosh networks, print over AppleTalk (EtherTalk) or TCP/IP, using Bonjour (Zeroconf) functions.

Note

???The imagePROGRAF printer driver is not compatible with AppleTalk.

???Example of a NetWare network

Note

???Even if there is a NetWare server in your network environment, you can use it in conjunction with TCP/IP or AppleTalk. In this case, complete the settings for each protocol you will use.

562 Network Setting

Network Setting

Con???guring the IP Address on the Printer

You must con???gure the printer???s IP address before using the printer in a TCP/IP network.

The printer???s IP address is con???gured automatically when you install the printer driver following the instructions in the Setup Guide.

Con???gure the IP address by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, the printer Control Panel, or ARP or PING commands, if the IP address is changed, or if you change the printer connection mode to a network connection. For details on con???guring the IP address, refer to the following topics.

???Con???guring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (???P.564)

???Con???guring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel (???P.565)

???Con???guring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands (???P.567)

Important

???If you use a DHCP server for automatic assignment of the printer???s IP address, printing may no longer be possible after the printer is turned off and on. This is because an IP address different from before has been assigned. Thus, when using DHCP server functions, consult your network administrator and con???gure the settings in one of the following ways.

???Con???gure the setting for dynamic DNS updating

In RemoteUI, activate the setting Enable DNS Dynamic Update. (???P.570)

???Con???gure the setting for assignment of the same IP address each time the printer starts up

Note

???We recommend con???guring the printer???s IP address even if you will use the printer in networks other than TCP/IP networks. Con???guring the printer???s IP address enables you to use RemoteUI to con???gure the network settings and manage the printer with a web browser.

For details on RemoteUI, see ???Using RemoteUI???. (???P.569)

Network Setting 563

Network Setting

Con???guring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

On a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the printer to con???gure the printer???s IP address. This topic describes how to con???gure the IP address using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Important

???To con???gure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as ???Administrator??? account. We recommend that your network administrator con???gure the network settings.

???For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see ???Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility???. (???P.452)

When specifying an IPv4 IP address

1. Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.

2. In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to con???gure.

3. Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.

4. Select the IPv4 tab.

5. In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual.

6. Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.

7. Click OK after the Con???rmation message is displayed.

8. Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Note

???To con???gure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select

DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP.

???You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.

When specifying an IPv6 IP address

1. Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.

2. In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to con???gure.

3. Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.

4. Select the IPv6 tab.

5. In IPv6, select On.

6. When there is an IPv6-compatible router in the network environment, select On in Stateless Address.

Additionally, when there is an DHCPv6-compatible server in the network environment, select

On in DHCPv6.

Note

???When there is no IPv6-compatible router or DHCPv6-compatible server, select On in Manual and enter the IPv6 Address and Pre???x Length.

7.Click Set.

8.Click OK after the Con???rmation message is displayed.

9.Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

564 Network Setting

Network Setting

Con???guring the IP Address Using the Printer Control

Panel

This topic describes how to con???gure the printer???s IP address on the Control Panel.

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Interface Setup, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select TCP/IP, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select IPv4, and then press the OK button.

6.Press ??? or ??? to select IPv4 Settings, and then press the OK button.

7.Press ??? or ??? to select IP Address, and then press the OK button.

8.After you press ??? or ??? to select the input ???eld, numerical input is possible.

9.Press the ??? or ??? button to enter the value.

Note

???Pressing the ??? button increases the number by 1. The maximum value is ???9,??? after which ???0??? is displayed.

???Pressing the ??? button decreases the number by 1. The minimum value is ???0,??? after which ???9??? is displayed.

???Hold down ??? or ??? to increase or decrease the value continuously.

???Make sure the IP address you enter for the printer is not the same as any computer IP address in your network.

10.Repeat steps 8 and 9 to complete the settings, and then press the OK button.

11.Press the Menu button.

If you have changed the settings, a con???rmation message is displayed. Press ??? or ??? to select

Yes, and then press the OK button.

Network Setting 565

Network Setting

Important

???Be sure to complete step 11. This will activate the values you have entered.

???You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway on the Control Panel.

Note

??? If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.

566 Network Setting

Network Setting

Con???guring the IP Address Using ARP and PING

Commands

This topic describes how to con???gure the IP address using ARP and PING commands.

To use the ARP and PING commands, you will need to know the printer???s MAC address. You can con???rm the MAC address on the Control Panel.

1. Check the printer???s MAC address.

You can con???rm the MAC address on the Control Panel as follows:

1.On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

2.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Interface Setup, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select Ethernet Driver, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select MAC Address, and then press the OK button.

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

???You can investigate the MAC address by printing an interface setting report. (???P.65)

2.In Windows, open a command prompt, or in Mac OS X, start Terminal.

3.Execute the following command to add entries to the ARP table for managing IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses.

arp -s [IP address] [the printer???s MAC address you have veri???ed] Example: arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 00-1E-8F-xx-xx-xx

Note

???In Mac OS X when using Terminal, enter the arp command in the format ???arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 00:1E:8F:xx:xx:xx.??? For details, refer to the help ???le for the command line.

4.Execute the following command to send the IP address to the printer and con???gure it.

ping [IP address as speci???ed in the ARP command] -l 479 Example: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx -l 479

Note

???In ???-l,??? the ???l??? is the letter ???l???.

???In Mac OS X when using Terminal, enter the ping command in the format ???ping -s 479 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.??? For details, refer to the help ???le for the command line.

Network Setting 567

Network Setting

Note

???The subnet mask and default gateway are set to ???0.0.0.0.??? Use RemoteUI to change the subnet mask and default gateway to match your network settings.

For details on RemoteUI, see ???Using RemoteUI???. (???P.569)

Con???guring TCP/IPv6 Network Settings

When printing in a TCP/IPv6 network, you must con???gure the TCP/IPv6 settings on the Control Panel. Follow the steps below to con???gure the TCP/IPv6 network settings.

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Interface Setup, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select TCP/IP, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select IPv6, and then press the OK button.

6.Press ??? or ??? to select IPv6 Support, and then press the OK button.

7.Press ??? or ??? to select On, and then press the OK button.

Important

???Once you set IPv6 Support to On, the IPv6 StlessAddrs setting takes effect.

???You can also con???gure IPv6 StlessAddrs and DHCPv6 from the printer Control Panel.

568 Network Setting

Network Setting

Using RemoteUI

Enter the printer???s IP address in a web browser to display the RemoteUI page. After you log on to RemoteUI from the page, you can check and change the status of the printer and print jobs, and con???gure network settings.

To access RemoteUI, start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display the RemoteUI page.

http://???printer IP address or name???/ Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

For details on con???guring printer settings for networks, refer to the following topics.

???Con???guring the Printer???s TCP/IP Network Settings (???P.570)

???Con???guring the Printer???s AppleTalk Network Settings (???P.574)

???Con???guring the Printer???s NetWare Network Settings (???P.575)

???Specifying Printer-Related Information (???P.577)

Note

???RemoteUI also offers many other features. You can display the ink levels, check error messages and other status information, and cancel print jobs.

???By factory default, the English screen is displayed. To change the display language, select the desired language under Language before logging on in administrator mode.

Important

???Use Netscape Navigator 6.0 or later, Internet Explorer 5.01 or later, or Firefox 1.5 or later as a web browser. In Mac OS X, you can also use Safari 1.32 or later or Safari 2.03 or later.

???Access is not possible via a proxy server. In environments where a proxy server is used, add the printer???s IP address to Exceptions (addresses accessed without a proxy server) in the web browser proxy server settings. (Settings may vary depending on the network environment.)

???Enable JavaScript and cookies in the web browser.

???If you access RemoteUI with the printer name instead of its IP address, make sure the DNS settings are correctly con???gured.

Network Setting 569

Network Setting

Con???guring the Printer???s TCP/IP Network Settings

Follow the steps below to con???gure the TCP/IP network settings.

When using an IPv4 IP address

1. Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display the RemoteUI page.

http://???printer IP address or name???/

Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

2. Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.

3. If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.

4. Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.

5. Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the TCP/IPv4 group to display the Edit TCP/IP Protocol Settings page.

6. Refer to the TCP/IP Settings Items table to complete the settings.

TCP/IP Settings Items

570 Network Setting

7. Click OK to display the Network page.

Note

???If you specify to con???gure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, there must be a server that supports such protocol running in the network.

???If you specify to con???gure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, the IP address obtained by this method is used ???rst. If you cannot obtain the IP address, the address speci???ed in IP Address is used.

???It takes up to two minutes to determine whether DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP are available. We recommend clearing check boxes of options you will not use.

???If you are using a DNS server, select Enable DNS Dynamic Update and enter the IP Address for DNS servers, DNS host name, and DNS domain name in Primary DNS Server Address, Secondary DNS Server Address, DNS Host Name, and DNS Domain Name, respectively.

Network Setting 571

Network Setting

When using an IPv6 IP address

1. Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display the RemoteUI page.

http://???printer IP address or name???/

Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

2. Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.

3. If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.

4. Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.

5. Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the TCP/IPv6 group to display the Edit TCP/IP Protocol Settings page.

6. Refer to the TCP/IP Settings Items table to complete the settings.

TCP/IP Settings Items

572 Network Setting

7. Click OK to display the Network page.

Network Setting 573

Network Setting

Con???guring the Printer???s AppleTalk Network Settings

Follow the steps below to con???gure the AppleTalk network settings.

1. Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display the RemoteUI page.

http://???printer IP address or name???/

Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

2. Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.

3. If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.

4. Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.

5. Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the AppleTalk group to display the Edit AppleTalk Protocol Settings page.

6. Refer to the AppleTalk Settings Items table to complete the settings.

AppleTalk Settings Items

*1: The object name you have speci???ed in Name is displayed in Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center) in Mac OS X 10.2.8-10.4. If you use multiple printers in the same zone, assign a unique name to each printer. By default, the network interface name is ???Canon NB-18GB (xxxxxx).??? (Here, xxxxxx is the last six digits of the printer???s MAC address.)

*2: If zones have been created on the network, enter the name of the printer???s zone. If there are no zones, leave the asterisk ???*??? entry (for the default zone) as it is. If you enter a network zone name that does not match created zones, the printer will not be detected by Macintosh computers. Consult your network administrator for information on zone names.

7. Click OK to display the Network page.

574 Network Setting

Network Setting

Con???guring the Printer???s NetWare Network Settings

Follow the steps below to con???gure the NetWare network settings.

1. Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display the RemoteUI page.

http://???printer IP address or name???/

Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

2. Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.

3. If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.

4. Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.

5. Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetWare group to display the Edit NetWare Protocol Settings page.

6. Refer to the NetWare Settings Items table to complete the settings.

NetWare Settings Items

Network Setting 575

Network Setting

7. Click OK to display the Network page.

576 Network Setting

Network Setting

Specifying Printer-Related Information

Specify device information, security, and email noti???cation settings as follows.

1. Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display

the RemoteUI page. http://???printer IP address or name???/ Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

2. Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.

3. If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.

4. Click Information in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Information page.

5. To display the relevant settings page, click Edit in the upper-right corner of Device Information

or Security, depending on what information you want to specify.

To change the administrator password, click the Change Password button in the Security group.

6. Refer to the table of settings for device information, security, and email noti???cation as you

complete these settings.

Security setting items are displayed when you click the Change Password button in the

Security group.

Device Information Settings

Security Settings

On the Security settings screen, besides entering a password, you can specify other security-related information, such as IP address-based SNMP or TCP usage restrictions, MAC address-based access restrictions, or IPP and FTP authentication settings.

7. Click OK to activate the settings.

Network Setting 577

Network Setting

Con???guring the Communication Mode Manually

This topic gives instructions for con???guring the communication mode manually.

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Interface Setup, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select Ethernet Driver, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Auto Detect, and then press the OK button.

6.Press ??? or ??? to select Off, and then press the OK button. The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu.

7.Press ??? or ??? to select Comm.Mode, and then press the OK button.

8.Press ??? or ??? to select the communication mode, and then press the OK button. The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu.

9.Press ??? or ??? to select Ethernet Type, and then press the OK button.

10.Press ??? or ??? to select the Ethernet type, and then press the OK button. The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu.

11.Press ??? or ??? to select Spanning Tree, and then press the OK button.

12.Press ??? or ??? to enable or disable spanning tree support, and then press the OK button. The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu.

13.Press the Menu button.

After the con???rmation message is displayed, press the OK button. The new settings will take effect after the printer restarts.

578 Network Setting

Network Setting

Email Noti???cation When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur

The printer can notify you of the printer status by email. Even when you are away from the printer, you can know when printing is ???nished or if errors occur. Receive noti???cation via email on your mobile phone or at your computer.

Use the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) function to set up email recipients and message timing. Besides being informed of ???nished print jobs or errors, you can also complete settings for email noti???cation when service is needed or it???s time to replace consumables. For detailed instructions,see ???Specifying Printer-Related Information???. (???P.577)

Note

???For details on email noti???cation using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (in Windows), refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.

???Mail server authentication is only supported with imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.

Network Setting 579

Network Setting

Initializing the Network Settings

Use RemoteUI to restore the network settings to the default values as follows.

Important

???Initializing the network settings will also restore the default value of the printer???s IP address. As a result, the RemoteUI page cannot be displayed in the web browser after this procedure.

???For instructions on recon???guring the IP address, see ???Con???guring the IP Address on the Printer???. (???P.563)

???For details on RemoteUI, see ???Using RemoteUI???. (???P.569)

1.Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display the RemoteUI page.

http://???printer IP address or name???/ Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

2.Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.

3.If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.

4.Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.

5.Click Reset to Default settings in the lower-right corner of the Network Interface group.

6.After con???rming the message, click OK to restore the network settings to the default values.

Note

???You can also use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the Control Panel to restore the default network settings.

580 Network Setting

Network Setting (Windows)

Network Setting (Windows)

Con???guring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)

This topic describes how to specify the printer driver destination if the printer???s IP address is changed, or if you will use the printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.

The procedure described below is the con???guration based on the LPR or Raw protocol using the standard TCP/IP port in Windows (Standard TCP/IP Port).

Important

???If you will use the printer in a TCP/IP network, make sure the printer???s IP address is con???gured correctly.

???Con???guring the IP Address on the Printer (???P.563)

1.Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers) window.

2.Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Properties to open the printer properties window.

3.Click the Port tab to display the Port sheet.

4.Click Add Port to display the Printer Ports dialog box.

5.In the Available Port list, select Standard TCP/IP Port.

6.Click New Port.

After the wizard starts, a window is displayed for the Welcome to the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard.

7.Click Next.

8.In Printer Name or IP Address, enter the printer???s IP address.

9.Follow the instructions on the screen to add a printer port.

10.Click Close to close the Printer Ports dialog box.

11.Make sure the printer port you added is displayed under Ports, and that the port is selected.

12.Click Close to close the printer properties window.

Network Setting 581

Network Setting (Windows)

Sharing the Printer in Windows

If you set up a computer as a print server in Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, or Windows Server 2008, the computer can receive print jobs sent from other computers (clients) connected to it for printing. This topic describes how to share the printer in Windows.

Important

??? We recommend that your network administrator con???gure your network for printer sharing.

1.Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers) window.

2. Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Sharing to open the printer properties window.

582 Network Setting

Network Setting (Windows)

3. On the Sharing sheet, click Share this printer and enter the shared name.

4. To print jobs from clients running other versions of Windows, click Additional Drivers and follow the instructions to install the printer driver of the corresponding version.

If you are prompted to choose the location of the printer driver ???le, insert the provided User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and specify the folder where the printer driver is located.

5. Click OK.

Important

???When installing the printer driver on client computers, select "Network Printer" on the connection type screen in the printer wizard, and then select the printer shared from the computer set up as the print server.

Network Setting 583

Network Setting (Windows)

Con???guring the Printer???s NetWare Network Settings

Follow the steps below to con???gure the NetWare network settings.

1. Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display the RemoteUI page.

http://???printer IP address or name???/

Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

2. Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.

3. If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.

4. Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.

5. Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetWare group to display the Edit NetWare Protocol Settings page.

6. Refer to the NetWare Settings Items table to complete the settings.

NetWare Settings Items

584 Network Setting

7. Click OK to display the Network page.

Network Setting 585

Network Setting (Windows)

Specifying the Printer???s Frame Type

To enable communication between the printer and computers on your network, specify the Ethernet frame type in your NetWare environment.

Follow these steps to specify the frame type by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the printer Control Panel.

Note

??? You can specify the frame type by using RemoteUI if the printer???s IP address is con???gured.

Important

???Before specifying the frame type, make sure the printer is on and connected to the network.

???For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see ???Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility???. (???P.452)

Specifying the frame type using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

1. Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

2. In the list of printers, select the printer to con???gure.

3. Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.

4. Click the NetWare tab and select the frame type in the NetWare Frame Type list.

5. Click the IPv4 tab and select ETHERNET II in the Frame Type list.

6. In IP Address, enter the IP address assigned to the printer, and then enter the subnet mask in

Subnet Mask and the default gateway in Gateway Address.

Important

???You must specify the IP address here to be able to con???gure NetWare protocol settings using RemoteUI.

7.Click Set.

8.Click OK after the Con???rmation message is displayed.

9.Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

586 Network Setting

Network Setting (Windows)

Specifying the frame type using the printer Control Panel

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Interface Setup, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select NetWare, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select NetWare, and then press the OK button.

6.Press ??? or ??? to select On, and then press the OK button. The display reverts to the NetWare menu.

7.Press ??? or ??? to select Frame Type, and then press the OK button.

8.Press ??? or ??? to select the frame type to use, and then press the OK button. The display reverts to the NetWare menu.

9.Press ??? or ??? to select Print Service, and then press the OK button.

10.Press ??? or ??? to select the desired print service, and then press the OK button. The display reverts to the NetWare menu.

11.Press the Menu button.

If any of the settings is changed, a con???rmation message is displayed. In this case, press the OK button.

Important

??? Be sure to complete step 11. This will activate the values you have entered.

Note

???If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.

???To cancel this process, press the Stop button.

Network Setting 587

Network Setting (Windows)

Specifying NetWare Print Services

Before printing in a NetWare network, you must con???gure print services such as print servers, print queues, and so on. You can con???gure the print service settings from a computer using any of the following Novell software provided with NetWare.

???NWADMIN

???PCONSOLE

Important

???If you use NWADMIN to con???gure the print service settings, Novell Client (the Novell NetWare client software) must be installed as the client software application.

???NetWare networking is unsupported in Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008.

This topic gives instructions for con???guring NetWare print services. The order of this procedure may vary depending on the environment.

Choosing the type of print services

Before completing print service settings, choose the type of print service. Refer to the following descriptions as needed.

Note

???In NetWare 5.1 or 6.0, NDPS may also be used as the print service. If you use NDPS, use the Novell printer gateway included with NetWare. For details on con???guring NDPS, refer to the NetWare documentation.

???NDS (Novell Directory Service) and bindery

NDS and bindery are both supported. Use the mode that is compatible with your network environment.

???Queue server mode and remote printer mode

Queue server mode and remote printer mode are both supported.

???Queue server mode

When using queue server mode, all print server functions are supported, so there is no need for other print server software or hardware. In NDS queue server mode (NDS PServer), the NDS print server is used for printing. In bindery queue server mode (Bindery PServer), the bindery print server is used for printing. Note that if you use queue server mode, a NetWare user license is required for each network interface.

???Remote printer mode

In remote printer mode, the printer is controlled by the NetWare print server. Thus, a NetWare print server is required. In NDS remote printer mode (NPrinter), the NDS print server is used for printing, and in bindery remote printer mode (RPrinter), the bindery print server is used for printing.

588 Network Setting

Network Setting (Windows)

Using NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to set up the print server

Use NWADMIN to set up the print server if NDS queue server mode or remote printer mode is used.

1.

2.

Log into NetWare as Administrator or with equivalent rights, and then start NWADMIN.

Run Quick Setup.

1.Choose Print Services Quick Setup in the Tools menu.

2.Enter a desired name in Print Server Name. To use an existing print server, click the button at right and choose the name from the list.

3.Enter a desired printer name in Name.

4.To use the printer in queue server mode, choose Other/Unknown in Type. To use the printer in remote printer mode, choose Parallel in Type, click Communications, and set Ports to LPT1 and

Connection Type to Manual Load.

5.Enter a desired queue name in Name.

6.In Volume, enter the volume object (that is, the object representing the physical volume on the network) where the print queue will be created. Click the button at right to choose from a list.

7.Complete other settings as needed and click OK.

Note

???The print server name will be required when con???guring the printer???s protocol settings. Write down the print server name for future reference.

???When running Quick Setup, the printer is assigned printer number ???0.??? When using the printer in queue server mode, do not change the printer number from ???0.???

3.Set a password.

1.Right-click the print server created in step 2 and choose Details.

2.Click Change Password to open the password input dialog box. Enter the password.

3.Click OK to close the password input dialog box.

4.Click OK or Cancel to close the details dialog box.

4.To use the printer in remote printer mode, start the print server.

To use the NetWare ???le server as the print server, enter ???LOAD PSERVER.NLM??? at the ???le server and press the Enter key.

Note

??? This procedure is not required when using queue server mode.

Network Setting 589

Network Setting (Windows)

Use PCONSOLE to set up the print server if bindery queue server mode or remote printer mode is used.

1.

2.

3.

Log into NetWare as Admin and start PCONSOLE.

Switch to bindery mode.

If the print server has not been created, create it.

1.In Available Options, select Quick Setup, and press the Enter key.

2.Enter the name of the new print server, the new printer, and the queue.

Note

???The print server name will be required when con???guring the printer???s protocol settings. Write down the print server name for future reference.

4.Specify the printer type.

1.To use the printer in queue server mode, choose Other/Unknown in Type. To use remote printer mode, set Printer Type to Parallel and Position to Manual Load.

2.Press the Esc key.

3.After the con???rmation message is displayed, choose Yes and press the Enter key.

5.Set a password.

1.In Available Options, select Print Servers and press the Enter key.

2.Select the print server created in step 2 and press the Enter key.

3.Select Password, and press the Enter key to display the password input dialog box.

4.Enter the password and press the Enter key.

6.Press the Esc key several times to display the dialog box for con???rming that PCONSOLE is ???nished.

7.Click Yes to exit PCONSOLE.

590 Network Setting

Network Setting (Windows)

Specifying NetWare Protocols

Follow the steps below to con???gure NetWare protocol settings other than the frame type by using RemoteUI.

Note

???For details on RemoteUI, see ???Using RemoteUI???. (???P.569)

1.Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display the RemoteUI page.

http://???printer IP address or name???/ Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

2.Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.

3.If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.

4.Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.

5.Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetWare group to display the Edit NetWare Protocol Settings page.

6.Make sure the Frame Type indicates the frame type used on the NetWare network.

7.To use burst mode, choose On for NCP Burst Mode.

Note

???Burst mode supports fast data transfer when printing in queue server mode. Normally, choose On.

8.In Print Application, click the print service to be used.

Note

???Only one print service selected here will be enabled. Multiple print services are not available at the same time.

9.For packet signature, click If Requested by Server in Packet Signature.

10.Complete the following settings based on the selected service.

???If you have selected Bindery PServer: Queue Server Mode (Using a Bindery Print Server)

1.In File Server Name, enter the ???le server name.

2.In Print Server Name, enter the name of the print server created in "Specifying NetWare Print Services. (???P.588)"

3.In Print Server Password, enter the password of the print server created in "Specifying NetWare Print Services. (???P.588)"

4.In Polling Interval, specify the interval at which the printer checks the NetWare print queue.

???If you have selected RPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (Using a Bindery Print Server)

1.In Print Server Name, enter the advertising name of the print server created in "Specifying NetWare Print Services. (???P.588)"

2.In Printer Number, enter the same printer number speci???ed in "Specifying NetWare Print Services. (???P.588)"

Network Setting 591

Network Setting (Windows)

???If you have selected NDS PServer: Queue Server Mode (Using an NDS Print Server)

1.In Tree Name and Context Name, enter the tree and context name of the print server.

2.In Print Server Name, enter the name of the print server created in "Specifying NetWare Print Services. (???P.588)"

3.In Print Server Password, enter the password of the print server created in "Specifying NetWare Print Services. (???P.588)"

4.In Polling Interval, specify the interval at which the printer checks the NetWare print queue.

???If you have selected NPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (Using a NDS Print Server)

1.In Print Server Name, enter the advertising name of the print server created in "Specifying NetWare Print Services. (???P.588)" Usually, the advertising name is the same as the name of the print server.

2.In Printer Number, enter the same printer number speci???ed in "Specifying NetWare Print Services. (???P.588)"

11.Click OK to display the Network page.

For a list of NetWare protocol settings items, see ???Con???guring the Printer???s NetWare Network Settings???. (???P.575)

592 Network Setting

Network Setting (Windows)

Con???guring NetWare Network Settings

To print over a NetWare network, con???gure the network environment as follows.

Important

???To con???gure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as ???Administrator??? account. We recommend that your network administrator con???gure the network settings.

1.Specify the Ethernet frame type for communication between the printer and computers. For instructions, see ???Specifying the Printer???s Frame Type???. (???P.586)

2.Specify the NetWare print services, including the print server and queue. For instructions, see ???Specifying NetWare Print Services???. (???P.588)

3.Specify NetWare protocol details besides the frame type.

For instructions, see ???Specifying NetWare Protocols???. (???P.591)

After you have completed the steps above, con???gure each computer for printing over the NetWare network.

4.Connect to the NetWare network.

Install NetWare client software on each computer to be used for printing over the network, and log in to the NetWare server or tree. For instructions on connection, refer to the NetWare and operating system documentation.

5.Install the printer driver.

Follow the instructions of your network administrator to install the printer driver on each computer to be used for printing. When installing the printer driver, choose Network Printer as the printer destination, and then choose the print queue created from the NetWare print service settings.

6.Follow these steps to con???gure the printer port. This step is not necessary if you speci???ed the printer destination during installation of the printer driver.

1.Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers) window.

2.Right-click the printer icon and choose Properties.

3.Click the Port (or Advanced) tab to display the Port (or Advanced) sheet.

4.As the destination port, specify the print queue created by con???guring the NetWare print service settings.

Network Setting 593

Network Setting (Windows)

Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer as follows:

Important

???In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008, you must log on with administrative rights equivalent to the ???Administrator??? account.

1.Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.

2.On the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software.

3.Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

4.Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.

594 Network Setting

Network Setting (Windows)

Con???guring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

On a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the printer to con???gure the printer???s IP address. This topic describes how to con???gure the IP address using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Important

???To con???gure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as ???Administrator??? account. We recommend that your network administrator con???gure the network settings.

???For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see ???Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility???. (???P.452)

When specifying an IPv4 IP address

1. Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.

2. In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to con???gure.

3. Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.

4. Select the IPv4 tab.

5. In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual.

6. Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.

7. Click OK after the Con???rmation message is displayed.

8. Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Note

???To con???gure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select

DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP.

???You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.

When specifying an IPv6 IP address

1. Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.

2. In the Device Name list displayed, select the printer to con???gure.

3. Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.

4. Select the IPv6 tab.

5. In IPv6, select On.

6. When there is an IPv6-compatible router in the network environment, select On in Stateless Address.

Additionally, when there is an DHCPv6-compatible server in the network environment, select

On in DHCPv6.

Note

???When there is no IPv6-compatible router or DHCPv6-compatible server, select On in Manual and enter the IPv6 Address and Pre???x Length.

7.Click Set.

8.Click OK after the Con???rmation message is displayed.

9.Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Network Setting 595

Network Setting (Mac OS X)

Network Setting (Mac OS X)

Con???guring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)

Specify the printer driver destination as follows if the printer???s IP address is changed, or if you will use the printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.

???If you switch to printing in an AppleTalk network, see ???Con???guring the Destination for AppleTalk Networks (Macintosh)???. (???P.598)

???If you switch to printing in a TCP/IP network, or if the printer???s IP address is changed, see ???Con???guring the Destination in TCP/IP Networks (Macintosh)???. (???P.600)

???If you switch to printing in a Bonjour network, see ???Con???guring the Destination for Bonjour Network (Macintosh)???. (???P.602)

596 Network Setting

Network Setting (Mac OS X)

Con???guring the Printer???s AppleTalk Network Settings

Follow the steps below to con???gure the AppleTalk network settings.

1. Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address) box to display the RemoteUI page.

http://???printer IP address or name???/

Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/

2. Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.

3. If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.

4. Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.

5. Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the AppleTalk group to display the Edit AppleTalk Protocol Settings page.

6. Refer to the AppleTalk Settings Items table to complete the settings.

AppleTalk Settings Items

*1: The object name you have speci???ed in Name is displayed in Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center) in Mac OS X 10.2.8-10.4. If you use multiple printers in the same zone, assign a unique name to each printer. By default, the network interface name is ???Canon NB-18GB (xxxxxx).??? (Here, xxxxxx is the last six digits of the printer???s MAC address.)

*2: If zones have been created on the network, enter the name of the printer???s zone. If there are no zones, leave the asterisk ???*??? entry (for the default zone) as it is. If you enter a network zone name that does not match created zones, the printer will not be detected by Macintosh computers. Consult your network administrator for information on zone names.

7. Click OK to display the Network page.

Network Setting 597

Network Setting (Mac OS X)

Con???guring the Destination for AppleTalk Networks (Macintosh)

To print over an AppleTalk network, activate the AppleTalk protocol and con???gure the destination as follows.

Activating AppleTalk on the printer

Important

??? By factory default, the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer.

1.On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Interface Setup, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select AppleTalk, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select On, and then press the OK button.

6.Press the Menu button.

If any of the settings is changed, a con???rmation message is displayed. In this case, press the OK button.

Important

??? Be sure to complete step 6. This will activate the values you have entered.

Note

???By using RemoteUI, you can also specify the object name used for AppleTalk, as well as the printer zone name.

For details on RemoteUI, see ???Using RemoteUI???. (???P.569)

598 Network Setting

Network Setting (Mac OS X)

Con???guring the destination (Mac OS X)

Important

??? AppleTalk is supported in Mac OS X 10.2.8-10.4.

Note

???The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of con???guring the destination varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.

1.In System Preferences, click Network to display the Network window.

2.In Show, choose Built-in Ethernet. Next, click AppleTalk, select Make AppleTalk Active, and click Apply now.

3. Close the Network window and save the settings.

Network Setting 599

Network Setting (Mac OS X)

Con???guring the Destination in TCP/IP Networks

(Macintosh)

Follow these steps to con???gure the destination when using the printer in a TCP/IP network.

Important

???If you use the printer in a TCP/IP network, make sure the printer???s IP address is con???gured correctly. (???P.565)

Con???guring the Destination (Mac OS X)

1.

2.

Navigate to Applications > Canon Utilities > imagePROGRAF PrinterSetup and double-click

imagePROGRAF PrinterSetup.app.

Click Next.

3. Select the printer to register and click Next.

Note

???When specifying an IP address, click Registering IP Address.

Enter the IP address of the printer to set up in IP Address and click Next.

600 Network Setting

Network Setting (Mac OS X)

4. Complete Printer Name and Location as desired and click Register.

5. Click Finish.

Network Setting 601

Network Setting (Mac OS X)

Con???guring the Destination for Bonjour Network (Macintosh)

In Mac OS X 10.2.8 and later, use Bonjour functions to easily connect the printer to the network. Follow the steps below to con???gure the destination if you use the printer on TCP/IP network.

Important

???Bonjour and IP Print (Auto) do not support printing to a printer on other network groups that require a router for connection. Make sure the computer and printer are on the same network. For information about network settings, ask your network administrator.

???By default, Bonjour is activated on the printer. The printer name as displayed in Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center) in Mac OS X is prede???ned as the Multicast DNS Service Name. You can activate or deactivate the Bonjour function or change the printer name by using RemoteUI. For instructions on changing it, see ???Using RemoteUI???. (???P.569)

1.Choose Utilities (or Applications) in the Go menu of Finder.

2.Click Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center) in the Utilities folder.

3.If the printer name is not displayed in Printer List, click Add.

4. Select the printer from the list in the Printer Browser window and click Add.

602 Network Setting

Adjusting the Printhead

Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Adjusting the Printhead

Adjusting the Printhead

If printed documents are affected by the following problems, try adjusting the printhead.

???Printing is faint or affected by banding in different colors Execute Nozzle Check to check for printhead nozzle clogging. For instructions, see ???Checking for Nozzle Clogging???. (???P.630)

???Printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment Execute Head Posi. Adj. to adjust the printhead position.

Normally, execute Auto(Standard) or Auto(Advanced). However, when using special paper or if printing is not improved after executing Auto(Advanced), try Manual.

(???P.604)

(???P.606)

???Printed lines are misaligned

Execute Head Inc. Adj. to adjust the angle of inclination of the printhead. Even slight misalignment can be corrected.

(???P.608)

???Paper rubs against the printhead, or image edges are blurred

Executing Head Height to adjust the printhead height may improve printing results. (???P.611)

Adjustments for Better Print Quality 603

Adjusting the Printhead

Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors (Head Posi. Adj.)

If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, execute Head Posi. Adj. to adjust the Printhead alignment.

There are two modes for automatic Printhead adjustment: Auto(Standard) and Auto(Advanced). Auto(Standard) will ???x most slight image distortion or color misalignment, but if not, try Auto(Advanced). Use Auto(Standard) or Auto(Advanced) to have the printer print and read a test pattern for automatic adjustment of the Printhead.

Important

???Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper speci???ed on the printer. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.

???This function is not available with CAD Tracing Paper, CAD Translucent Matte Film, or CAD Clear Film. If adjustment is not possible as expected using highly transparent ???lm or similar media, try another type of paper, or try Manual adjustment.

(???P.606)

Note

???When printing on special paper, or if printing is not improved after Auto(Advanced), try Manual. (???P.606)

???Use Auto(Standard) if you have switched to another type of paper or if you want the boundaries between colors to appear as clear as possible.

???Use Auto(Advanced) to ???ne-tune the space between nozzles or colors if you have switched the printhead or if clearer printing is required. We recommend Auto(Advanced) for printing at the highest level of quality.

???We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment.

Paper to Prepare

Perform adjustment as follows.

1. Load the paper.

???Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (???P.103)

???Loading Rolls in the Printer (???P.106)

???Loading Sheets in the Printer (???P.136)

604 Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Adjusting the Printhead

2. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

3.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select Adjust Printer, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Head Posi. Adj., and then press the OK button.

6.Press ??? or ??? to select Auto(Standard) or Auto(Advanced), and then press the OK button. A test pattern is printed for adjustment.

Adjustment is now ???nished if you have printed on a roll or a sheet of A2 size or larger.

7.If you are printing on sheets smaller than A2 size for Auto(Advanced), a con???rmation message is displayed requesting you to continue printing. Press the OK button and follow the instructions displayed.

Adjustments for Better Print Quality 605

Adjusting the Printhead

Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors (Head Posi. Adj.)

If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, execute Head Posi. Adj. to adjust the Printhead alignment.

Normally, execute Auto(Standard) or Auto(Advanced). (???P.604)

However, when printing on special paper, or if printing is not improved after Auto(Advanced), try Manual. Manual adjustment requires you to examine the printed test pattern and enter an adjustment value.

Note

???Manual may be unavailable in some cases, even if it is displayed in the menu. If so, execute Auto(Advanced) once.

???Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper speci???ed on the printer. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.

???We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment.

Paper to Prepare

Perform adjustment as follows.

1. Load the paper.

???Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (???P.103)

???Loading Rolls in the Printer (???P.106)

???Loading Sheets in the Printer (???P.136)

2.On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

3.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select Adjust Printer, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Head Posi. Adj., and then press the OK button.

606 Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Adjusting the Printhead

6. Press ??? or ??? to select Manual, and then press the OK button. A test pattern is printed for adjustment.

7. Press ??? or ??? to select D, and then press the OK button.

8. Press ??? or ??? to select D-1, and then press the OK button.

9. Examine adjustment test pattern D-1 and determine the number with straight lines.

Note

???If two patterns seem equally good and you cannot decide which one is better, choose an intermediate value.

For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.

10.Press ??? or ??? to select the pattern number you have decided, and then press the OK button.

11.Repeat steps 8-10 to specify the adjustment value for D-2 to D-5 and D-7 to D-11.

12.Press the Back button.

13.Press ??? or ??? to select Register Setting, and then press the OK button.

14.Press ??? or ??? to select Yes, and then press the OK button.

The adjustment value is now registered, and adjustment is complete.

Adjustments for Better Print Quality 607

Adjusting the Printhead

Adjusting Line Misalignment (Head Inc. Adj.)

If printed lines are misaligned, execute Head Inc. Adj. to adjust the angle of inclination of the Printhead. Executing Head Inc. Adj. requires you to examine a printed test pattern and enter an adjustment value.

Paper to Prepare

Perform adjustment as follows.

1. Load the paper.

???Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (???P.103)

???Loading Rolls in the Printer (???P.106)

???Loading Sheets in the Printer (???P.136)

Note

???When loading paper, specify the type of paper correctly. Using paper that you have not speci???ed on the printer may cause feeding problems and affect the printing quality.

???We recommend loading a type of paper that you use often.

2.On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

3.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select Adjust Printer, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Head Inc. Adj., and then press the OK button.

After the Carriage is moved, a message is displayed requesting you to open the Top Cover.

6.Open the Top Cover.

608 Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Adjusting the Printhead

7. Align the Angle Adjustment Lever with the red square and close the Top Cover.

A test pattern is printed for adjustment.

Important

??? Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b). Touching these parts may damage them.

???If you accidentally move the Carriage, you will hear a warning tone. In this case, close the Top Cover.

8.Examine the test pattern for adjustment. Determine the straightest set of lines.

9.Open the Top Cover and move the Angle Adjustment Lever to match the number (or the square) of the straightest set of lines.

If no single set of lines is perfectly straight, move the Angle Adjustment Lever to a position between the numbers (or between the number and the square) of the two sets of lines that are least misaligned.

Adjustments for Better Print Quality 609

Adjusting the Printhead

10. Close the Top Cover.

The Printhead is now straight, and adjustment is complete.

610 Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Adjusting the Printhead

Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images

(Head Height)

If the Printhead rubs against paper during printing, adjusting the Printhead height may improve results. If image edges are blurred, it may help to lower the Printhead.

Note

???Raise or lower the printhead, depending on the nature of the problem. (???P.670)

(???P.671)

(???P.676)

1.On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Paper Details, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Head Height, and then press the OK button.

6.Press ??? or ??? to select the desired setting value, and then press the OK button.

Note

???Depending on the type of paper, some setting values may not be available.

Adjustments for Better Print Quality 611

Adjusting the feed amount

Adjusting the feed amount

Adjusting the Feed Amount

If printed documents are affected by the following problems, try adjusting the feed amount.

???Banding in different colors

???Line length is not accurate in the direction paper is fed To adjust the feed amount, do the following, in this order.

1.Depending on the issue, adjust Adj. Priority to suit the particular type of paper. (???P.613)

2.Execute Adj. Quality or Adjust Length, depending on the selection in Adj. Priority. (???P.614)

(???P.616)

(???P.619)

3.After executing Adj. Quality, execute Adj. Fine Feed for further adjustment as needed. (???P.618)

612 Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Adjusting the feed amount

Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method (Feed

Priority)

Methods of adjusting the amount paper is fed are set in Adj. Priority.

Adjust Adj. Priority to suit your particular printing application.

???Print Quality : Adjusts the feed amount to reduce banding across the sheet in printed documents.

Adj. Quality settings are applied. When Adj. Fine Feed is executed, the Adj. Fine Feed settings are applied in addition to the Adj. Quality settings.

???Print Length : Adjusts the feed amount for better accuracy of lines in printed documents. The settings of A:High or B:Standard/Draft in Adjust Length are applied.

???Automatic : Print Quality or Print Length is selected, depending on Print Priority as selected in the printer driver at the time of printing.

Image or Of???ce Document : Print Quality is selected.

Line Drawing/Text : Print Length is selected.

Note

???Either B:Standard/Draft or A:High in the Adjust Length menu is applied, depending on printer driver settings at the time of printing.

???If you have selected Easy Settings in the printer driver, follow these steps to con???rm the Print Priority setting.

???Windows: Click View Settings on the Main tab to display the View Settings dialog box.

???Mac OS X: Click View set. on the Main pane to display the View settings dialog box.

Follow these steps to con???gure the settings.

1. Load the paper.

???Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (???P.103)

???Loading Rolls in the Printer (???P.106)

???Loading Sheets in the Printer (???P.136)

2.On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

3.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select Adjust Printer, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Feed Priority, and then press the OK button.

6.Press ??? or ??? to select Adj. Priority, and then press the OK button.

7.Press ??? or ??? to select Automatic, Print Quality, or Print Length, and then press the OK button.

Adjustments for Better Print Quality 613

Adjusting the feed amount

Automatic Banding Adjustment (Adj. Quality)

If printed images are affected by banding in different colors across the sheet, execute Adj. Quality for automatic adjustment of the paper feed amount.

There are two modes of automatic adjustment to correct banding: Auto(GenuinePpr) and Auto(OtherPaper). In either mode, the printer prints and reads a test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount.

???Auto(GenuinePpr)

Use this mode with paper identi???ed in the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

???Auto(OtherPaper)

Use this mode with paper not in the Paper Reference Guide, or if Auto(GenuinePpr) does not eliminate banding.

(???P.95)

Note

???Always check the Adj. Priority values before using Auto(GenuinePpr) or Auto(OtherPaper). (???P.613)

???Adjustment is not possible with Auto(GenuinePpr) and Auto(OtherPaper) when using highly transparent media.

In this case, use Manual adjustment. (???P.616)

???If additional ???ne-tuning is necessary after Auto(GenuinePpr) and Auto(OtherPaper), execute Adj. Fine Feed.

(???P.618)

???Use Adjust Length to ensure that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length. (???P.619)

???This may take some time, depending on the type of paper.

???Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.

Paper to Prepare

Perform adjustment as follows.

1. Load the paper.

???Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (???P.103)

???Loading Rolls in the Printer (???P.106)

???Loading Sheets in the Printer (???P.136)

Note

???Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper speci???ed. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.

614 Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Adjusting the feed amount

2. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

3.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select Adjust Printer, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Feed Priority, and then press the OK button.

6.Press ??? or ??? to select Adj. Quality, and then press the OK button.

7.Press ??? or ??? to select Auto(GenuinePpr) or Auto(OtherPaper), and then press the OK button. A test pattern is printed for adjustment.

Adjustment is now ???nished if you have printed on a roll or a sheet of A2 size or larger.

8.If you are printing on sheets smaller than A2 size for Auto(GenuinePpr), a con???rmation message is shown on the Display Screen requesting you to continue printing.

Press the OK button and follow the instructions on the Display Screen.

Adjustments for Better Print Quality 615

Adjusting the feed amount

Manual Banding Adjustment (Adj. Quality)

If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, execute Adj. Quality for adjustment of the paper feed amount.

Use Manual adjustment with highly transparent media or other paper for which Auto(GenuinePpr) or

Auto(OtherPaper) cannot be used.

(???P.614)

Manual adjustment requires you to enter an adjustment value after a test pattern is printed.

Note

???Always check the Adj. Priority values before using Manual adjustment. (???P.613)

???If additional ???ne-tuning is necessary after Manual adjustment, use Adj. Fine Feed (???P.618)

???Use Adjust Length to ensure that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length. (???P.619)

???Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.

Paper to Prepare

Perform adjustment as follows.

1. Load the paper.

???Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (???P.103)

???Loading Rolls in the Printer (???P.106)

???Loading Sheets in the Printer (???P.136)

Note

???Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper speci???ed. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.

2.On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

3.

4.

5.

6.

Note

??? If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

Press ??? or ??? to select Adjust Printer, and then press the OK button. Press ??? or ??? to select Feed Priority, and then press the OK button. Press ??? or ??? to select Adj. Quality, and then press the OK button.

616 Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Adjusting the feed amount

7. Press ??? or ??? to select Manual, and then press the OK button. Test pattern A is printed for manual adjustment.

Note

???When printing on sheets, follow the instructions on the Display Screen and remove the sheet.

8.Examine test pattern A for adjustment. Determine the pattern in which banding is least noticeable.

Note

???If banding seems least noticeable in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better, choose an intermediate value.

For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.

9.Press ??? or ??? to select the pattern number you have decided, and then press the OK button. Test pattern B is printed for adjustment.

Note

???If you printed test pattern A on a sheet, follow the instructions on the Display Screen and use another sheet of the same type of paper.

Additionally, after test pattern B is printed, follow the instructions on the Display Screen and remove the sheet.

10.Examine test pattern B for adjustment. Determine the pattern in which banding is least noticeable.

11.Press ??? or ??? to select the pattern number you have decided, and then press the OK button.

The adjustment value is now registered, and adjustment is complete.

Adjustments for Better Print Quality 617

Adjusting the feed amount

Fine-Tuning the Paper Feed Amount (Adj. Fine Feed)

If the contrast is uneven or banding in different colors appears at 50 mm (2.0 in) intervals in printed documents, try executing Adj. Fine Feed during printing to ???ne-tune the feed amount.

Note

???Always execute Adj. Quality before Adj. Fine Feed.

Once you execute Adj. Quality, the Adj. Fine Feed value will revert to 0. (???P.614)

(???P.616)

Perform adjustment as follows.

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Adj. Fine Feed, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select a setting value in the range -5 to +5, and then press the OK button. The setting is now applied.

618 Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Adjusting the feed amount

Adjusting Line Length (Adjust Length)

To ensure that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly the right length, use Adjust Length to adjust the amount that paper is advanced.

There are two options in Adjust Length : AdjustmentPrint and Change Settings.

???AdjustmentPrint

After a test pattern is printed, you will measure the discrepancy based on the results of printing.

???Change Settings

No test pattern is printed. Instead, you will measure a document already printed to determine the discrepancy.

Additionally, two modes are available in both AdjustmentPrint and Change Settings : A:High or B:Standard/Draft. Choose the mode that suits your particular printing application.

???A:High

This setting is applied when Highest or High is selected in Print Quality in the printer driver.

???B:Standard/Draft

This setting is applied when Standard or Draft is selected in Print Quality in the printer driver.

Note

???Always check the Adj. Priority values before using Adjust Length. (???P.613)

???Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.

Paper to Prepare

Perform adjustment as follows.

1. Load the paper.

???Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (???P.103)

???Loading Rolls in the Printer (???P.106)

???Loading Sheets in the Printer (???P.136)

Note

???Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper speci???ed. Adjustment cannot be completed correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings.

2.On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

??? If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

Adjustments for Better Print Quality 619

Adjusting the feed amount

3. Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4. Press ??? or ??? to select Adjust Printer, and then press the OK button.

5. Press ??? or ??? to select Feed Priority, and then press the OK button.

6. Press ??? or ??? to select Adjust Length, and then press the OK button.

7. Press ??? or ??? to select AdjustmentPrint or Change Settings, and then press the OK button. When you select AdjustmentPrint, a test pattern is printed for you to measure the scale and calculate the discrepancy. The scale bar shows ???Millimeter??? in 50 mm units and ???Inch??? in 1 inch units.

Note

???A test pattern is printed in black when you choose A:High or in magenta if you choose

B:Standard/Draft.

???To cancel printing the test pattern for adjustment, hold down the Stop button. When Stop printing? is displayed, press ??? or ??? to select Yes, and then press the OK button.

8.Press ??? or ??? to enter the amount of discrepancy, and then press the OK button.

If the scale is shorter than the actual size, use a positive setting value. If it is longer, use a negative value.

The feed amount can be adjusted in 0.02% increments.

620 Adjustments for Better Print Quality

Adjusting the feed amount

Adjusting the Vacuum Strength (VacuumStrngth)

When printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily, if the Printhead rubs against paper, adjusting the level of suction against paper on the Platen may improve results.

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Paper tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Paper Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Paper Details, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select VacuumStrngth, and then press the OK button.

6.Press ??? or ??? to select the desired setting value, and then press the OK button.

Adjustments for Better Print Quality 621

Ink Tanks

Maintenance

Ink Tanks

Ink Tanks

Ink tanks that can be used in the printer are labeled with a white letter ???J??? in a black circle on the side. When purchasing ink tanks, make sure a ???J??? is printed on the label, along with the following Ink Tank serial numbers.

???130 ml (4.4 ??? oz) per color

???BK Ink Tank PFI-102BK

???MBK Ink Tank PFI-102MBK

???C Ink Tank PFI-102C

???M Ink Tank PFI-104M

???Y Ink Tank PFI-102Y

Note

???For instructions on ink tank replacement, see ???Replacing Ink Tanks???. (???P.623)

???You can also use ink tanks other than M Ink Tank PFI-104M that are simply labeled ???A.???

622 Maintenance

Ink Tanks

Replacing Ink Tanks

Compatible ink tanks

Ink tanks that can be used in the printer are labeled with a white letter ???J??? in a black circle on the side. Request ink tanks with the same label when you purchase new ones. For details, see ???Ink Tanks???. (???P.622)

Precautions when handling ink tanks

Take the following precautions when handling ink tanks.

Caution

???For safety, keep ink tanks out of the reach of children.

???If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.

???There may be ink around the ink supply section of ink tanks you removed. Handle ink tanks carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.

Important

???Do not install used ink tanks in another model of printer.

This will prevent correct ink level detection, which may damage the printer or cause other problems.

???We recommend using up an Ink Tank in the course of printing within six months after breaking the seal. Printing quality may be affected if you use older ink tanks.

???Do not leave the printer without ink tanks installed for extended periods (a month or more). Residual ink may become clogged inside the printer and affect printing quality.

Make sure the printer is ready for Ink Tank replacement

You can replace ink tanks if the Display Screen advises you to check the amount of ink left or replace ink tanks.

If a message requests you to replace an Ink Tank, press the OK button. In this case, you can skip the step ???Access the menu for ink tank replacement.??? Follow the instructions in ???Remove the ink tanks.???

Important

???Do not remove an Ink Tank during initialization immediately after turning on the printer, or during printhead cleaning.

Note

???Ink Tank replacement is possible even during printing, when print jobs are being canceled, or when paper is being advanced.

Maintenance 623

Ink Tanks

Access the menu for Ink Tank replacement

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Ink tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Ink Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Rep. Ink Tank, and then press the OK button.

A message on the Display Screen requests you to open the Ink Tank Cover. Remove the Ink Tank at this point.

Remove the Ink Tank

1. Open the Ink Tank Cover and check the ink lamps. Ink lamps ???ash when there is little ink left.

2. Press the tip of the Ink Tank Lock Lever of the color for replacement horizontally and pull the Ink Tank Lock Lever up to open it.

624 Maintenance

Ink Tanks

3. Hold the Ink Tank by the grips and remove it. Press the OK button.

Caution

???If there is still ink in the Ink Tank you removed, store it with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains. Put the Ink Tank in a plastic bag and seal it.

Note

??? Dispose of used ink tanks according to local regulations.

Install the ink tanks

1. Before opening the pouch, gently agitate the Ink Tank once or twice. Agitate the ink in the Ink Tank by slowly rotating the Ink Tank upside-down and right side up repeatedly.

Caution

??? Do not remove and agitate ink tanks that have already been installed in the printer. Ink may leak out.

Important

??? If you do not agitate the Ink Tank, the ink may settle, which may affect printing quality.

Maintenance 625

Ink Tanks

2. Open the pouch and remove the Ink Tank.

Caution

???Never touch the ink holes or electrical contacts. This may cause stains, damage the Ink Tank, and affect printing quality.

3.Press the OK button and insert the Ink Tank into the holder facing as shown, with the ink holes down.

Important

???Ink tanks cannot be loaded in the holder if the color or orientation is incorrect.

If the Ink Tank does not ???t in the holder, do not force it into the holder. Make sure the color of the Ink Tank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink Tank and check the orientation of the Ink Tank before reloading it.

4.Push the Ink Tank Lock Lever closed until it clicks into place.

626 Maintenance

Ink Tanks

5.

6.

Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red.

Note

??? If the Ink Lamp is not lit, reload the tank.

Close the Ink Tank Cover.

Maintenance 627

Ink Tanks

Checking Ink Tank Levels

On the Display Screen, you can check how much ink is left in the ink tanks.

To check remaining Ink Tank levels, access the Tab Selection screen on the Control Panel and press ??? or

??? to select the Ink tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

???If an error has occurred and the Tab Selection screen cannot be displayed, display Ink Info as follows.

1.Press the OK button to display Printer Info.

2.Press the ??? or ??? button to select Ink Info.

3.Press the OK button.

The remaining ink levels shown on the Display Screen correspond to the inks identi???ed by the Color Label on the bottom of the Display Screen.

These symbols may be displayed above the ink level: ???!??? if ink is low, ???????? if no ink is left, and ??????? if you have deactivated ink level detection.

The remaining ink level is indicated as shown below.

If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Ink Tank, replace the Ink Tank. If a message is displayed indicating to check the remaining ink levels, or after tasks that consume a lot of ink such as large-format printing or head cleaning, check the remaining levels and replace Ink Tank as needed. (???P.623)

628 Maintenance

Ink Tanks

When to Replace Ink Tanks

Replace or prepare to replace ink tanks in the following situations.

If a message for checking the ink is shown on the Display Screen

When there is little ink left, the Message Lamp is lit and Not much ink is left. is shown on the Display Screen. You can continue to print, but prepare to replace the Ink Tank. (???P.628)

Before print jobs and maintenance that consume a lot of ink

If little ink is left, there may not be enough for large-format printing, head cleaning, and maintenance, which require a lot of ink. In this case, replace or prepare to replace the Ink Tank before maintenance.

If a message for ink replacement is shown on the Display Screen

When ink runs out, the Message Lamp ???ashes, a message regarding Ink Tank replacement is shown on the Display Screen, and printing is disabled. Replace the Ink Tank at this point.

Maintenance 629

Printheads

Printheads

Printhead

A replacement Printhead.

??? Printhead PF-04

Note

??? For instructions on replacing the Printhead, see ???Replacing the Printhead???. (???P.633)

Checking for Nozzle Clogging

If printing is faint or affected by banding in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test pattern to check the nozzles.

Note

???Nozzles are periodically checked to ensure they are clear. Con???gure the settings on the Control Panel menu in Nozzle Check. (???P.49)

1.Load unused paper.

???Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls (???P.103)

???Loading Rolls in the Printer (???P.106)

???Loading Sheets in the Printer (???P.136)

2.On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

3.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select Test Print, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Nozzle Check, and then press the OK button. The printer now prints a test pattern for checking the nozzles.

630 Maintenance

Printheads

6. Check the printing results.

If the horizontal lines are not faint or incomplete, the nozzles are clear.

If some sections of the horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, the nozzles for those colors are clogged.

If horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, follow the steps below and check again for nozzle clogging.

1.Clean the Printhead. (???P.632)

2.Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.

Note

???If you repeat these steps several times but the horizontal lines are still faint or incomplete, contact your Canon dealer.

Maintenance 631

Printheads

Cleaning the Printhead

If printing is faint, cleaning the Printhead may improve results.

Choose one of two Printhead cleaning modes (Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B), depending on the problem to resolve.

???Head Cleaning A

Use this mode if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning consumes the least amount of ink.

It takes about three minutes to complete.

???Head Cleaning B

Use this mode if no ink is ejected at all, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the problem. It takes about three and a half minutes to complete.

Caution

???Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or ink tanks during either Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B.

Note

???If printing does not improve after Head Cleaning B, try repeating Head Cleaning B once or twice. If this still does not improve printing, the Printhead may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

???Nozzles are periodically checked to ensure they are clear. Con???gure the settings on the Control Panel menu in Nozzle Check. (???P.49)

Perform cleaning as follows.

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Maintenance, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select Head Cleaning, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B, and then press the OK button. Head cleaning is now executed.

6.Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the nozzles. (???P.630)

632 Maintenance

Printheads

Replacing the Printhead

When to replace the Printhead

Replace the Printhead in the following situations.

???If the printing quality does not improve even after one or two cycles of Head Cleaning B from the printer menu

???If the Display Screen indicates Open top cover and replace the printhead.

???If your Canon dealer has advised you to replace the Printhead

Compatible printheads

For information on compatible printheads, see ???Printhead???. (???P.630)

Precautions when handling the Printhead

Take the following precautions when handling the Printhead.

Caution

???For safety, keep the Printhead out of the reach of children.

???If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.

???Do not touch the Printhead immediately after printing. The Printhead becomes extremely hot, and there is a risk of burns.

Important

???There may be ink around the nozzles of the Printhead you remove. Handle the Printhead carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.

???Do not open the Printhead pouch until immediately before installation. After removing the Printhead from the pouch, install it right away. If the Printhead is left after the pouch is opened, the nozzles may dry out, which may affect printing quality.

Maintenance 633

Printheads

Access the menu for Printhead replacement

Caution

???When replacing the Printhead immediately after printing, wait a few minutes before replacing it. The metal parts of the Printhead become hot during printing, and there is a risk of burns from touching these parts.

Note

???Prepare a new Ink Tank when ink levels are low.

???Your hands may become dirty during Printhead replacement. Use the gloves provided with the new Printhead for replacement.

1.If the roll is not ejected because of the cutting method selected, cut it manually and remove it. (???P.331)

2.Clean inside the Top Cover. (???P.647)

3.On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

4.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Maintenance, and then press the OK button.

6.Press ??? or ??? to select Replace P.head, and then press the OK button. Ink is now ???lled.

After about two minutes, a message is shown on the Display Screen instructing you to open the Top Cover.

634 Maintenance

Printheads

Replace the Printhead

1. Open the Top Cover.

Instructions are now shown on the Display Screen regarding Printhead replacement.

Important

???During Printhead replacement, do not move the Carriage from the position indicated. If you accidentally move the Carriage, you will hear a warning tone, and Printhead replacement is no longer possible.

If you move the Carriage by mistake, close the Top Cover. The Carriage will be moved to the position as indicated.

2.If the Printhead Fixer Cover or Printhead Fixer Lever is dirty, use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe it clean.

Maintenance 635

Printheads

Important

??? Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b). Touching these parts may damage them.

???Never touch the metal contacts of the Carriage. This may damage the printer.

3.Pull the Printhead Fixer Lever forward all the way to open it completely.

4. Pull up the Printhead Fixer Cover to open it completely.

5. Remove the Printhead and press the OK button.

Note

??? Dispose of the used Printhead in accordance with local regulations.

636 Maintenance

Printheads

6. Holding the new Printhead by the grips (a), remove it from the pouch.

Important

???When handling the Printhead, always hold it by the grips (a). Never touch the nozzles (b) or metal contacts (c). This may damage the Printhead and affect printing quality.

???Never touch the ink supply section (d). This may cause printing problems.

???If you need to put a Printhead somewhere temporarily before installation, do not keep the nozzles and metal contacts facing down. If the nozzles or metal contacts are damaged, it may affect the printing quality.

7.While ???rmly holding the Printhead you have removed, use your other hand to remove the orange Protective Part (a). Squeeze the grips (c) of Protective Part (b) and pull it down to remove it.

Important

???The inside surface of the Protective Part (a) and Protective Part (b) is coated with ink to protect the nozzles. Be careful not to touch these surfaces when removing the caps.

???The Printhead contains ink to protect the nozzles. We recommend removing Protective Part (b) as you hold it over the Printhead package or safely out of the way to avoid spilling ink and staining your clothes or the surrounding area. If ink accidentally spills, wipe off the ink with a dry cloth.

???Do not reattach the Protective Part or protective material. Dispose of these materials in accordance with local regulations.

Maintenance 637

Printheads

8. With the nozzles facing down and the metal contacts toward the back, insert the Printhead into the Carriage. Carefully push the printhead ???rmly into the Carriage, ensuring that the nozzles and metal contacts do not touch the carriage.

9. Pull the Printhead Fixer Cover down toward the front to lock the Printhead in place.

10. Push the Printhead Fixer Lever toward the back of the printer until it clicks.

11. Close the Top Cover.

Ink now ???lls the system. It takes about six minutes for ink to ???ll the system.

Important

???Never remove an Ink Tank while the system is ???lling with ink.

???After Printhead has been replaced and ???lled with ink, Head Posi. Adj. (Auto(Advanced)) is performed if you have selected Rep.P.head Print > On in the Control Panel menu. (???P.49) In this case, follow the instructions on the Display Screen for Printhead adjustment.

If Rep.P.head Print is Off, perform Head Posi. Adj. (Auto(Advanced)) yourself. (???P.604)

638 Maintenance

Maintenance Cartridge

Maintenance Cartridge

Maintenance Cartridge

A replacement Maintenance Cartridge.

??? Maintenance Cartridge MC-10

Note

???For instructions on replacing the Maintenance Cartridge, see ???Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge???. (???P.639)

Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge

Compatible maintenance cartridges

For information on compatible maintenance cartridges, see ???Maintenance Cartridge???. (???P.639)

Precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge

Take the following precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge.

Caution

???For safety, keep the Maintenance Cartridge out of the reach of children.

???If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.

???To prevent ink from leaking from a used Maintenance Cartridge, avoid dropping the cartridge or storing it at an angle. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

???Ink adheres to the top of the Maintenance Cartridge after it has been used. Handle the Maintenance Cartridge carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.

Important

???Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge except to replace it.

???Do not install a used Maintenance Cartridge in another printer.

Maintenance 639

Maintenance Cartridge

Make sure the printer is ready for Maintenance Cartridge replacement

You can replace Maintenance Cartridge if the Display Screen advises you to check the remaining capacity or replace the Maintenance Cartridge.

If a message is displayed requesting Maintenance Cartridge replacement, you can skip the step ???Access the menu for Maintenance Cartridge replacement.??? Follow the instructions in ???Replace the Maintenance Cartridge.???

Caution

???Do not replace the Maintenance Cartridge during initialization immediately after turning on the printer, during Printhead cleaning, or when ink is being absorbed. Ink may leak out.

Access the menu for Maintenance Cartridge replacement

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Maintenance, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select Repl. maint cart, and then press the OK button.

A message on the Display Screen advises you to open the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.

640 Maintenance

Maintenance Cartridge

Replace the Maintenance Cartridge

1. Open the box, remove the plastic bag and packaging material, and take out the Maintenance Cartridge.

Important

??? Never touch the metal contacts (a). This may damage the Maintenance Cartridge.

2. At this point, open the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.

3. Hold the used Maintenance Cartridge by the grip (a) with one hand and put your other hand under the Maintenance Cartridge to hold it ???rmly on the bottom, keeping it level as you pull it out.

Caution

???Used maintenance cartridges are heavy. Always grasp the cartridge ???rmly and keep the cartridge level during removal and storage. If you drop a used Maintenance Cartridge or store it at an angle, ink may leak and cause stains.

Maintenance 641

Maintenance Cartridge

Important

???The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is recorded on each printer. Do not install a used Maintenance Cartridge in another printer.

4.Keep the used Maintenance Cartridge level as you put it in the plastic bag. Expel excess air from the plastic bag and seal the zipper.

5.Con???rm the Maintenance Cartridge is right-side up, put it in the box with the packaging material attached, and store it so that it stays level.

Caution

???Always put the used Maintenance Cartridge back in the box and store the box on a ???at surface. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

Note

???In accordance with active and ongoing environmental programs, Canon supports recycling of used maintenance cartridges. Follow the instructions provided with the new Maintenance Cartridge that describe how to process the used Maintenance Cartridge.

6.Keeping the new Maintenance Cartridge level, insert it all the way in.

642 Maintenance

Maintenance Cartridge

7. Close the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.

8. Press the OK button.

The printer now initializes the Maintenance Cartridge.

Maintenance 643

Maintenance Cartridge

Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity

The Maintenance Cartridge absorbs excess ink from borderless printing, printhead cleaning, and other processes. You can con???rm the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge by checking the Maintenance Cartridge capacity shown on the Display Screen.

To check remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity, access the Tab Selection screen on the Control Panel and press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

??? If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, replace the Maintenance Cartridge. If a message is displayed indicating to check the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge, or before tasks that deplete much of the capacity such as head cleaning or preparations to move the printer, check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and replace the Maintenance Cartridge as needed. (???P.639)

644 Maintenance

Maintenance Cartridge

When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge

Replace or prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge in the following situations.

If a message for checking the Maintenance Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen

When the Maintenance Cartridge is almost full, the Message Lamp is lit and The level is low is shown on the Display Screen. You can continue to print, but check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one. (???P.644)

When much of the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is depleted

Printhead cleaning, Printhead replacement, and preparations to transfer the printer deplete much of the Maintenance Cartridge capacity. (In particular, preparing to move the printer depletes a lot of the capacity.) Check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity before this maintenance and replace the Maintenance Cartridge if necessary.

If a message for the Maintenance Cartridge replacement is shown on the Display Screen

When the Maintenance Cartridge is full, the Message Lamp ???ashes and a message to replace the Maintenance Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen. Printing is disabled, and you cannot replace the Printhead or transfer the printer. Replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one.

Maintenance 645

Cleaning the Printer

Cleaning the Printer

Cleaning the Printer Exterior

Clean the printer regularly to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.

To ensure a comfortable working environment, clean the printer exterior about once a month.

1. Turn the printer off. (???P.24)

2. Unplug the power cord from the outlet.

Caution

???Always turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning or maintenance. Accidentally leaving the printer on poses a risk of injury if you touch moving parts inside the printer.

3.Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe the exterior surfaces of the printer. Dry the surfaces with a dry cloth.

Caution

???Never use ???ammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of ???re or electrical shock.

Important

???If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered with paper dust.

4.Plug the power cord into the outlet.

646 Maintenance

Cleaning the Printer

Cleaning Inside the Top Cover

Clean inside the Top Cover about once a month to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems. Also clean inside the Top Cover in the following situations to ensure optimal operation.

???If the printed surface or the underside of paper is dirty after printing

???After you have used up a roll

???After borderless printing

???After printing on small paper

???After printing on paper that generates a lot of cutting debris

???If you have replaced the roll

???After printing on paper that generates a lot of paper dust

???After printing on adhesive paper

Important

???If the Platen inside the Top Cover becomes dirty, it may soil the underside of paper. We recommend cleaning the Platen after borderless printing or printing on small paper.

???If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered with paper dust.

???Printing on adhesive paper may leave adhesive on the Platen, Paper Retainer, or other parts. To prevent paper jams, we recommend cleaning inside the Top Cover after printing.

1.Open the Top Cover.

2. If paper dust has accumulated in the Vacuum holes (a) on the Platen or in the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves (b), use the Cleaning Brush (c), provided with the printer, to wipe it away.

Note

??? If the Cleaning Brush is dirty, rinse it in water.

Maintenance 647

Cleaning the Printer

3. Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe inside the Top Cover to clean it. Wipe away any ink residue on the Platen as a whole (a), the Paper Retainer (b), Borderless Printing Ink Grooves (c), and Ejection Guide (d).

Important

???Do not use a dry cloth to wipe inside the Top Cover. This may create a static charge, which may attract dust and affect the printing quality.

???Never use ???ammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of ???re or electrical shock.

???Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b).

648 Maintenance

Cleaning the Printer

Note

???When cleaning between the Platen and Ejection Guide, use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe over the Output Tray and along grooves.

4. Close the Top Cover.

Maintenance 649

Cleaning the Printer

Cleaning the Printhead

If printing is faint, cleaning the Printhead may improve results.

Choose one of two Printhead cleaning modes (Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B), depending on the problem to resolve.

???Head Cleaning A

Use this mode if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning consumes the least amount of ink.

It takes about three minutes to complete.

???Head Cleaning B

Use this mode if no ink is ejected at all, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the problem. It takes about three and a half minutes to complete.

Caution

???Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or ink tanks during either Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B.

Note

???If printing does not improve after Head Cleaning B, try repeating Head Cleaning B once or twice. If this still does not improve printing, the Printhead may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

???Nozzles are periodically checked to ensure they are clear. Con???gure the settings on the Control Panel menu in Nozzle Check. (???P.49)

Perform cleaning as follows.

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Maintenance, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select Head Cleaning, and then press the OK button.

5.Press ??? or ??? to select Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B, and then press the OK button. Head cleaning is now executed.

6.Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the nozzles. (???P.630)

650 Maintenance

Other Maintenance

Other Maintenance

Preparing to Transfer the Printer

To protect the internal parts in transit, always follow these steps before transferring the printer to a new location. Refer to the Setup Guide for details on packing the printer and installing it after transfer.

Important

???Be sure to contact your Canon dealer before transferring the printer to a new location. Ink may leak and damage the printer if you do not prepare the printer correctly and it is tipped or stood on end in transit.

Note

???It is not possible to prepare the printer for transfer if the Display Screen requests you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge or check the remaining capacity. Replace the Maintenance Cartridge before transfer preparations. In this case, you will need one new Maintenance Cartridge. (???P.639)

???Depending on the state of the printer, part replacement may be necessary when preparing to transfer the printer (that is, when you execute the printer menu item to prepare for transfer).

Remove paper

1. Remove the paper.

???Rolls (???P.116)

???Sheets (???P.144)

Access the Move Printer menu

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Prep.MovePrinter, and then press the OK button.

Once preparations are ???nished, a message on the Display Screen requests you to open the Ink Tank Cover.

Important

???If consumables must be replaced, the message Consumables must be replaced. Call for service. is shown on the Display Screen and preparation is not possible. If this message is displayed, press the OK button and contact your Canon dealer for assistance.

Maintenance 651

Other Maintenance

Remove the Ink Tank

1. Open the Ink Tank Cover.

2. Pressing the tip of the Ink Tank Lock Lever horizontally, lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever to release the lock.

3. Holding the ink tanks by the grips, remove them.

Note

???Store the ink tanks you removed with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to remove all ink tanks.

5. Push all ink tank lock levers closed until they click into place.

652 Maintenance

Other Maintenance

6. Close the Ink Tank Cover.

At this point, ink is drawn out from inside the tubes.

Important

??? Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge during this process.

When the process is ???nished, Completed! Turn Power Off!! is displayed.

Pack the printer

1. Press the Power button and turn off the printer.

Important

???Turn off the printer before you unplug it. It may damage the printer if you unplug it before it is off and transfer it in that state. If you accidentally unplug the printer, plug it in again, reinstall the ink tanks, and follow this procedure again.

2.Disconnect the power cord and interface cable.

3.Tape down printer covers to secure them, in the reverse order of tape removal during installation.

4.Remove the Stand by reversing the installation procedure, when it was attached to the printer.

5.Disassemble and repackage the Stand by following the installation procedure in reverse.

6.Repack the Roll Holder, Holder Stopper, and printer in shipping materials, and then package them in a shipping box.

Maintenance 653

Other Maintenance

Updating the Firmware

Update the printer ???rmware to take advantage of new and improved printer functions.

Con???rming the ???rmware version

1. On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel, press ??? or ??? to select the Settings/Adj. tab ().

Note

???If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed, press the Menu button.

2.Press the OK button.

The Set./Adj. Menu is displayed.

3.Press ??? or ??? to select Printer Info, and then press the OK button.

4.Press ??? or ??? to select System Info, and then press the OK button. The ???rmware version is displayed.

Updating the Firmware

To obtain the latest ???rmware, visit the Canon website. If the ???rmware available online is newer than the installed ???rmware, update the printer ???rmware. For details on downloading and updating the ???rmware, visit the Canon website.

654 Maintenance

Frequently Asked Questions

Troubleshooting

Frequently Asked Questions

Frequently Asked Questions

This section presents frequently asked questions and answers. To view more detailed explanations, click the hyperlinks in the answer column.

Troubleshooting 655

Frequently Asked Questions

656 Troubleshooting

Problems Regarding Paper

Problems Regarding Paper

Clearing Jammed Paper (Paper Feed Slot)

Follow these steps to remove any scraps left in the Paper Feed Slot after you clear jammed sheets or roll paper.

1. Turn the printer off. (???P.24)

2. Push the Release Lever back.

3. Positioning your hands as shown, open the Roll Cover.

4. Fold an A4 sheet lengthwise four times and insert it through the gap of the Paper Feed Slot. Push the scrap out toward the Platen.

5. Remove the scrap when it is pushed out onto the Platen.

6. If any scraps remain inside the paper feed slot, repeat steps 4 and 5.

Troubleshooting 657

Problems Regarding Paper

7. Holding it at the positions indicated, close the Roll Cover.

8. Pull the Release Lever forward.

658 Troubleshooting

Problems Regarding Paper

Clearing Jammed Roll Paper

If paper from a roll becomes jammed, Paper jam. is shown on the Display Screen of the Control Panel. Remove the jammed paper as follows.

1. Open the Roll Cover. Use a commercially available cutter or the like to cut the paper of the loaded roll.

Caution

???When cutting paper, be careful to avoid injury or damage to the printer.

2.Push the Release Lever back.

3. Remove the jammed paper.

???If paper is jammed inside the Top Cover

1.Open the Top Cover and move the Carriage to the left or right side manually, away from the jam.

2.Clear any jammed paper from inside the Top Cover.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.

Troubleshooting 659

Problems Regarding Paper

3. Close the Top Cover.

Important

???Do not move the Carriage over jammed paper. This may damage the Printhead.

???Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b). This may stain your hands and damage the printer.

???If paper from a roll is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot

1.Open the Roll Cover.

2.Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.

660 Troubleshooting

Problems Regarding Paper

???If the paper is jammed by the Ejection Guide Remove the jammed paper from the Output Tray.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.

4. Pull the Release Lever forward.

Troubleshooting 661

Problems Regarding Paper

Clearing a Jammed Sheet

If a sheet becomes jammed, Paper jam. is shown on the Display Screen of the Control Panel. Remove the jammed paper as follows.

1. Push the Release Lever back.

2. Remove the jammed paper.

???If paper is jammed inside the Top Cover

1.Open the Top Cover and move the Carriage to the left or right side manually, away from the jam.

2.Clear any jammed paper from inside the Top Cover.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.

3.Close the Top Cover.

662 Troubleshooting

Problems Regarding Paper

Important

???Do not move the Carriage over jammed paper. This may damage the Printhead.

???Do not touch the Linear Scale (a) or Carriage Shaft (b). This may stain your hands and damage the printer.

???If the paper is jammed by the Paper Feed Slot Remove the jammed paper from the Paper Feed Slot.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.

???If the paper is jammed by the Ejection Guide Remove the jammed paper from the Output Tray.

After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer.

Troubleshooting 663

Problems Regarding Paper

3. Pull the Release Lever forward.

664 Troubleshooting

Depression on the leading edge is left

The size of clear ???lm cannot be detected

Troubleshooting 665

Problems Regarding Paper

Roll Paper is Continuously Ejected

666 Troubleshooting

Printing does not start

Printing does not start

The Data Reception Lamp on the Control Panel does not light up

The printer does not respond even if print jobs are sent

Ink Filling.. is displayed

The display screen indicates Agitating

Troubleshooting 667

The printer stops during a print job

The printer stops during a print job

An error message is shown on the Display Screen

The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper

The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the carriage stops moving)

668 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting 669

Problems with the printing quality

Paper rubs against the Printhead

670 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting 671

Problems with the printing quality

The surface of the paper is dirty

The back side of the paper is dirty

672 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting 673

Problems with the printing quality

Banding in different colors occurs

674 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting 675

Problems with the printing quality

Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs

The contrast becomes uneven during printing

676 Troubleshooting

Documents are printed in monochrome

Troubleshooting 677

Problems with the printing quality

Line thickness is not uniform

Lines are misaligned

Problems with the printing quality caused by the type of paper

For paper-speci???c troubleshooting tips to improve the printing quality, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (???P.95)

678 Troubleshooting

Cannot print over a network

Cannot print over a network

Cannot connect the printer to the network

Cannot print over a TCP/IP network

Troubleshooting 679

Cannot print over a network

Cannot print over a NetWare network

Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks

680 Troubleshooting

Installation problems

Installation problems

Removing Installed Printer Drivers

Follow these steps to remove installed printer drivers and utilities.

Removing printer drivers (Windows)

Remove the printer driver as follows.

Note

???In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008, you must log on with administrative rights, such as those of the ???Administrator??? account.

1.From the Windows start menu, select Programs >Canon Printer Uninstaller

>imagePROGRAF Printer Driver Uninstaller to display the Delete Printer window.

2.Select the printer in the list and click Delete.

3.Click Yes after the Warning message is displayed.

4.Make sure that the printer has been removed from the list, and then click Exit.

Removing printer drivers and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)

Remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF Printmonitor as follows.

1. Insert the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer in the CD-ROM drive.

2. Start the printer driver installer included in the User Software CD-ROM. Open the OS X folder and double-click iPF Driver Installer X.

3. In the upper left menu, choose Uninstall, and then click Uninstall.

4. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.

Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)

Remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor as follows.

1. From the Windows start menu, select Programs >imagePROGRAF Status Monitor

>Uninstaller (imagePROGRAF Status Monitor) to start the wizard.

2. In the wizard window, click Delete, and then click Next.

3. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.

Removing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (Windows)

Remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility as follows.

1. From the Windows start menu, select Programs >imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility

>Uninstaller (imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility) to start the wizard.

2. In the wizard window, click Delete, and then click Next.

3. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.

Troubleshooting 681

HP-GL/2 problems

HP-GL/2 problems

With HP-GL/2, printing is misaligned

Lines or images are missing in printed HP-GL/2 jobs.

Lines are printed too thick or thin in HP-GL/2 print jobs

HP-GL/2 jobs are printed in monochrome (or color)

Printed colors of lines are inaccurate during HP-GL/2 printing

682 Troubleshooting

HP-GL/2 problems

HP-GL/2 jobs are printed 6 mm larger than speci???ed

HP-GL/2 jobs are printed at maximum size, even if a standard size is speci???ed

HP-GL/2 printing takes a long time

Large print jobs with a lot of data take longer to print. Please wait a while until printing is ???nished.

Replotting with HP-GL/2 jobs is not possible.

The printer stops when printing a HP-GL/2 job (the carriage stops moving)

Troubleshooting 683

Other problems

Other problems

The printer does not go on

684 Troubleshooting

Other problems

If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound

and a half minutes.)

In other cases, contact your Canon dealer.

Troubleshooting 685

Other problems

Messages advising to check the maintenance cartridge are not cleared

The printer consumes a lot of ink

686 Troubleshooting

Other problems

Ink Level Detection

Ink level detection will be deactivated if you load ink tanks once emptied.

Ink level detection

Ink tanks speci???ed for this printer feature an ink level detection function to prevent the ink from running out during printing, which prevents printer damage. (???P.622)

This function will not work correctly if you use re???ll ink tanks. As a result, printing stops. Thus, before using re???ll ink tanks, you must cancel the ink level detection.

Printing with the ink level detection canceled may lead to printer damage and printing problems. Canon Inc. is not liable for any damage that may occur as a result of re???lling ink.

Caution

???After ink level detection has been released, this function cannot be reactivated for currently loaded Ink Tank. To use ink level detection again, replace the Ink Tank with new ones speci???ed for use with the printer.

???Repeatedly removing and inserting an Ink Tank may damage the connection between the Ink Tank and the printer, which may cause ink leakage from the Ink Tank and damage the printer.

Releasing ink level detection

1. On the Display Screen, a message indicates that the ink level cannot be detected. After checking the message, press the ??? button.

2. Press ??? or ??? to select Information, and then press the OK button.

3. A con???rmation message is shown on the Display Screen about releasing ink level detection. After checking the message, press the ??? button.

4. After checking the message, press the ??? button.

Troubleshooting 687

Other problems

5. Press ??? or ??? to select Yes, and then press the OK button.

6. Check the message and press the ??? button.

7. Check the message and press the ??? button.

8. Press ??? or ??? to select Yes, and then press the OK button.

9. A con???rmation message about updating ink information is shown on the Display Screen. After checking the message, press the ??? button.

10. Press ??? or ??? to select Yes, and then press the OK button.

Ink level detection is now released.

688 Troubleshooting

Messages regarding paper

Error Message

Messages regarding paper

MediaType Mismatch

Error Message 689

Messages regarding paper

The paper is too small.

690 Error Message

Messages regarding paper

The paper is too small.

Replace paper with A4/LTR (vertical) or larger

Replace roll with 10 in. wide or larger roll.

Remove paper and check pap. size

Error Message 691

Messages regarding paper

PaprWidth Mismatch

692 Error Message

Error Message 693

Messages regarding paper

Insuf???cient paper for job

This paper cannot be used.

Roll printing is selected.

694 Error Message

Error Message 695

Messages regarding paper

Sheet printing is selected.

Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded.

696 Error Message

Manually rewind the roll all the way and press OK.

Error Message 697

Messages regarding paper

Paper is crooked.

Note

???To disable this message (if it is displayed repeatedly despite reloading paper, for example), choose Off or Loose in the Skew Check Lv. setting of the printer menu. However, this may cause jams and printing problems because paper may be askew when printed. Also, the Platen may become soiled, which may soil the back of the next document when it is printed.

698 Error Message

Error Message 699

Messages regarding paper

Paper cutting failed.

End of paper feed.

700 Error Message

Messages regarding paper

Rel lever is in wrong position.

Borderless printng not possible.

Error Message 701

Messages regarding paper

Paper position not suitable for borderless printing.

Roll paper is not securely in contact with roll holder.

702 Error Message

Error Message 703

Messages regarding ink

Ink tank is empty.

Not much ink is left.

No ink tank loaded.

There is a problem with the Ink Tank.

Replace it with a new Ink Tank. (???P.623)

Wrong ink tank.

Do not pull out ink tank.

704 Error Message

Messages regarding printing or adjustment

Messages regarding printing or adjustment

Cannot adjust printhead.

Cannot adjust paper feed.

Error Message 705

Messages regarding printing or adjustment

Check printed document.

706 Error Message

Error Message 707

Messages regarding printheads

No printhead

Execute printhead cleaning.

708 Error Message

Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge

Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge

Insert the maintenance cartridge.

Wrong maintenance cartridge.

Maint. cart. The level is low

No Maintenance Cartridge capacity.

Maintenance cartridge full.

Maintenance cartridge problem.

Error Message 709

Messages regarding HP-GL/2

Messages regarding HP-GL/2

This type of paper is not compatible with HP-GL/2.

GL2: Wxxxx The memory is full. (xxxx is 0501, 0903, or 0904)

GL2: W0502 The parameter is out of range.

GL2: W0504 This command is not supported.

710 Error Message

Other Messages

Other Messages

GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)

ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)

Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)

Top cover is open.

The printer has detected that the Top Cover is open. Open the Top Cover fully, remove any foreign objects, and close the Top Cover again.

If the error occurs again, close the Top Cover, turn off the printer, and wait a while before restoring power.

Error Message 711

Other Messages

Prepare for parts replacement.

Parts replacement time has passed.

Unknown ???le.

Multi-sensor error

Error in cutter position.

712 Error Message

Index

Index

B

Index 713

714 Index

Index 715

D

716 Index

G

H

I

J

Index 717

718 Index

Index 719

720 Index

Index 721

R

722 Index

S

Index 723

T

724 Index

U

If a message for the Maintenance Cartridge replacement is shown on the Display Screen...645

Z

Index 725

??CANON INC. 2009